Matrix (2007) - Car HYUNDAI - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Matrix (2007) HYUNDAI

Illustration of a compact car with a visible roof and side door (no text or symbols)

HFC001-2

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time as part of our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to current Hyundai MATRIX models and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment are included. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

Please note that some MATRIX models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.

AD20A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2006 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

A070A01A-GAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

A0004815-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

A10DA01L-GAT

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Using imi-

tation, counterfeit or used salvage parts are not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by Hyundai Motor Company.

3. How can you tell if you purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below).

The export specifications are written in English only.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealership and Service Center.

Gen Parts Hybrid Genuine Parts Hybrid Genuine Parts Hybrid Genuine Parts Hybrid Genuine Parts A100A001

HYUNDAI

Genuine

Parts

HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts 28511-33361 MANIFOLD EXHAUST 1 PC LK MADE IN KOREA

A100A00L A100A04L

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (LEFT-HAND DRIVE)

B250A02FC-GAT

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts for identification

B250A02FC

1. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)

2. Headlight Leveling Switch (If installed)

3. Rear Fog Light Switch (If installed)

4. Multi-Function Light Switch

5. Indicator and Warning Light

6. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If installed)

7. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

8. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed)

9. Instrument Cluster

10.Hazard Warning Light

11.Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)

12.Audio System (If installed)

1. Accessory Tray

14.Passenger's Airbag (If installed)

15.Passenger's Drink Holder

16.Hood Release Lever

17.Multi Box

18.Ashtray

1. Cigarette Lighter

20.Shift Lever (If installed)

21.Drink Holder

22.Parking Brake Lever

23.Glove Box

1. Center Console (If installed)

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (RIGHT-HAND DRIVE)

B250B02FC-GAT

Labeled interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification

B250A02FC-D

1. Passenger's Drink Holder

2. Passenger's Airbag (If installed)

3. Accessory Tray

4. Audio System (If installed)

5. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)

6. Hazard Warning Light

7. Instrument Cluster

8. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed)

9. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

10.Horn and Driver's Airbag (If installed)

1. Indicator and Warning Light

2. Multi-Function Light Switch

3. Rear Fog Light Switch (If installed)

14.Headlight Leveling Switch (If installed)

15.Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)

16.Glove Box

1. Center Console (If installed)

2. Parking Brake Lever

3. Drink Holder

20.Shift Lever (If installed)

21.Cigarette Lighter

22.Ashtray

23.Multi Box

24.Hood Release Lever

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A02FC-GAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If installed)

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

Door Ajar Warning Light

Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

ESP OFF Electronic Stability Program Indicator Lights (If installed)

Malfunction Indicator Light

O/D OFF Indicator Light (1.6 Automatic Transaxle only)

Seat Belt Warning Light (If installed)

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

Charging System Warning Light

Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel)

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Fuel Recommendations 1-2

Breaking In Your New Hyundai 1-3

Keys.... 1-4

Immobilizer System 1-5

Door 1-7

Theft-Alarm System.... 1-10

Window 1-13

Seat 1-14

Seat Belts 1-21

Child Restraint System.... 1-28

Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System 1-37

Instrument Cluster and Indicator 1-44

Warning and Indicator Lights 1-48

Trip Computer 1-57

Multi-function Light Switch 1-59

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch....1-61

Sunroof 1-69

Mirror 1-73

Hood Release 1-76

Heating and Cooling Control 1-83

Stereo Sound System 1-99

Audio System 1-102

Antenna 1-133

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010A030-GAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Illustration of a car charging at a station with a fuel pump (no text or symbols visible)

For Europe – For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95/AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.

You may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON 91\~94/AKI 87\~90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle.

Except Europe – Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher must be used in Hyundai vehicle.

If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause the catalytic converter to become ineffective and the emission control system to malfunction. This can also result in increased maintenance expense. To avoid accidental use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle used with leaded gasoline at service stations can not be inserted into fuel tank opening of Hyundai vehicle.

NOTE:

For some countries, Hyundai vehicles are designed to use leaded gasoline. When you are going to use leaded gasoline, ask to Hyundai dealer whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle is available or not.

o Octane Rating of leaded gaso- line is same with unleaded one.

Use Diesel

Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is used in Hyundai vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions.

o Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.
o Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully: If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION:

Do not let any gasoline or water enter the tank. This would make it necessary to drain it out and to bleed the lines to avoid jamming the injection pump and damaging the engine.

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai. However, if your engine develops driveability problems, the use of 100% unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols other than ethanol, should not be used.

B010D01S-AAT

Do not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.

CAUTION:

Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol or fuels containing methanol.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recommends that you use gasolines treated with detergent additives, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System.

B010FD1A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

BREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B020AD1S-GAT

During the First 2,000 Km (1,200 Miles) (Gasoline Engine)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required with your new Hyundai. However, you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles).

o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55 mph).
o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start, depress the accelerator pedal fully.
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try to avoid hard braking.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't drive so slowly in too high a gear that the engine "bucks": shift to a lower gear).

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

BC20B01FC-GAT

During the First 1,000 Km (600 Miles) (Diesel Engine)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required with your new Hyundai. However, you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 1,000 km (600 miles).

o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) within 3,000 rpm.
o While driving, keep under three quarters of maximum speed.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start, depress the accelerator pedal fully.
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try to avoid hard braking.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't drive so slowly in too-high a gear that the engine "bucks": shift to a lower gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km (600 miles) of operation.

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

Illustration of a set of two key sets with no text or symbols

For greater convenience, the same key operates all the locks in your Hyundai. However, because the doors can be locked without a key, carrying a spare key is recommended in case you accidentally lock one key inside the car.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

5

B030001A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

S0123 8030018

A code number is stamped on the number plate that came with the keys to your Hyundai. This key number plate should not be left with the keys but kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. The key number should also be recorded in a place where it can be found in an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys if you can supply the key number.

B800A01A-GAT

(If Installed)

The immobilizer system is an anti-theft device, designed to deter automobile theft.

B880B03A-GAT

Keys

Illustration of two key sets with no visible text or symbols

All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are operated by the same key. However, since it is possible to lock the doors without the use of the key, care should be exercised to ensure that the key does not become locked inside the vehicle by mistake.

NOTE:

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

B880C02A-GAT

Key Numbers

M123 AX10030A

The vehicle key number is recorded upon a metal tag attached to the keys when the vehicle is first delivered to you.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6

The key number should be recorded and kept in a safe place in case the need to order further keys arises. New keys are available from any Hyundai dealer by quoting the relevant key number.

In the interest of security, the metal tag attached to the keys which bears the key number should be removed from the key ring after you receive your new vehicle. In addition, key numbers cannot be provided by Hyundai for security reasons.

If you need additional keys or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys.

B80002A-GAT

Limp home procedures

2 L → AIR BAG CHECK

B880D02FC

In case the immobilizer warning indicator blinks for five seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON" position, this indicates that the immobilizer system is out of order. And you cannot start the engine without the limp home procedures with ignition key.

The following procedure is how to start the engine with the function of the limp home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample password).

NOTE:

You can get the limp home password when the vehicle is first delivered to you. If you do not have the password, consult your authorized Hyundai dealer.

1. To set the password you may turn the ignition key "ON" and then turn it "OFF" according to the digit numbers, then the immobilizer indicator will blink along with the operation of the ignition key. For example, turn the ignition key once for digit number "1", and twice for "2", and so on. However, for the digit number "0", you must turn the ignition key for 10 times.
2. Wait for 3\~10 seconds.
3. You may set the remaining number of digits by following the same procedures 1 and 2.
4. If all of four digits have been tried successfully, turn the ignition key "ON" and check that the immobilizer indicator illuminates. From this time, you have to start your engine within 30 seconds. If you start your engine after 30 seconds, your engine will not start.

DOOR

7

NOTE:

If the engine dies while driving after limp home procedure, you can start your engine within 8 seconds without limp home procedure again.

1. If the immobilizer indicator blinks for five seconds, you have to try the limp home procedure again from the beginning.

After doing the limp home procedure, you have to consult with your authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION:

• If you fail to try the limp home procedure with the sequence of three times, you have to wait for about one hour to do the limp home procedure again.
  o If you cannot start your engine in spite of lImp home procedure, have your vehicle towed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

B04DA02Y-AAT

DOOR LOCKS

WARNING:

• Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Before you drive away (especially if there are children in the car), be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be inadvertently opened from the inside. This helps ensure that the doors will not be opened accidentally. Also, when combined with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident.
  o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
  o In case of accident the door is unlocked automatically (If installed)

B040B01A-AAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Doors With a Key

LOCK UNLOCK HFC2004

o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward the front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the key toward the rear.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8

B040C01FC-GAT

Locking From the Outside

Illustration of a car door with an inset showing a bullet-shaped object, no text or symbols present

The doors can be locked without a key. To lock the doors first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position, so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door. The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when the front doors close. This is normal. (If installed)

NOTE:

When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle.
To protect against theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and the tail gate when leaving your vehicle unattended.

B040001FC-GAT

Locking From the Inside

UNLOCK LOCK HFC2005

To lock the doors from the inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When this is done, neither the outside nor the inside door handles can be used.

NOTE:

When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible and the character "LOCK" on the switch is visible.

BO40E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Diagram showing car door lock and lock mechanism with labeled components and a magnified view of the door panel

Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-protector" rear door lock assembly. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot be opened from the inside. It's use is recommended whenever there are small children in the rear seat.

To engage the child-protector feature so that the door cannot be opened from the inside, move the child-protector lever to the " 🔒" position and close the door. Move the lever to the " 🔒" position when normal door operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull the outside door handle.

B040G02FC-GAT

Central Door Lock (If Installed)

Diagram of a car interior showing a highlighted component and a close-up view (no text or symbols)

The central door locking is operated by pushing the driver's door lock switch toward the front or rear of the vehicle. If the passenger and rear doors are open when the switch is pushed, the door will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:

When pushing the switch toward the rear, all doors and tail gate will unlock. When pushing the switch toward the front, all doors and tail gate will lock.

When the door is unlocked, the red mark on the switch is visible and the character "LOCK" on the switch is not visible.
The central door locking is operated by turning the key (with theft-alarm system: driver's door and passenger's door, without theft-alarm system: driver's door only) toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

B040H02L-GAT

Speed Sensing Auto door Locking (If installed)

When the speed of the vehicle keeps above 40km/h for 2-3 seconds, it will automatically lock all doors for driver and passenger's safety. But, the ignition key is removed, it will automatically unlock all doors.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

10

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT (If Installed)

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal lights.

B070B010-GAT Armed Stage

UNLOCK LOCK B070801FC

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine hood and tail gate are locked.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:

1) If any door, the tail gate or engine hood remains open, the system will not be armed.
2) If this happens, rearm the system as described previous.

CAUTION:

Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car.

B070C01FC-GAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the car is parked and the system is armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter.
2) The tail gate is opened without using the transmitter.
3) The hood is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and the turn signal light will blink continuously for 27 seconds (E.C only/ Except E.C 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock the door or tail gate with the transmitter.

B070D020-AAT

Disarmed Stage

Illustration of a key with a yellow clip and two keys, no text or symbols present

The system will be disarmed when the driver's or passenger's door is unlocked by depressing the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

After completion of the step above, the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:

Once the system has been disarmed, it can not be rearmed except by repeating the arming procedures.

CAUTION:

Only the transmitter can disarm the armed stage. If the transmitter does not disarm the system, it is necessary to take the following steps;

1. Unlock the door with the key, which will cause, the alarm to be activated.
2. Insert the key in the ignition key cylinder and turn the ignition key to "ON" position.
3. Wait for 30 seconds.

After completing the steps above, the system will be disarmed.

B070F02A-GAT

Keyless Entry System (If Installed)

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
2. At the same time all doors unlock, the turn signal light will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:

The transmitter will not work if any of following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit (10 m).
• The battery in the transmitter is weak.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

12

• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

NOTE:

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.

B070E02HP-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery becomes weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replacement instructions:

Screwdriver MSO-0048-1

1. Carefully separate the case with a blade screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

Case Battery MSO-0018-2

1. Remove the old battery from the case and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same(+side facing down), then insert it in the transmitter.

WINDOW

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

13

B060A01A-AAT

WINDOW GLASS

Diagram of a car door with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

To raise or lower the window, turn the window regulator handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

WARNING:

When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's arms, hands and body are safely out of the way.

B030A02E-AAT

POWER WINDOWS (If Installed)

(1) Open Close B080A01FC

The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main switches are located on the driver's armrest and control the front and rear windows on both sides of the vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the appropriate window switch and closed by pulling up the switch. To open the window on the driver's side, press the switch(1) down. The window moves as long as the switch is operated.

Illustration of a computer keyboard with an inset showing a key inserted into the mode (no text or symbols present)

In order to prevent operation of the passenger front and rear windows, a window lock switch is provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To disable the power windows, press the window lock switch.

To return to normal operation, press the window lock switch a second time.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

14

SEAT

Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side)

The Auto-Down window is moved to its fully open position by pushing the switch. To stop at the desired loction, the switch must be pulled up.

B080A01FC-GAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

WARNING:

Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, or an accident which may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

B000B02FC-GAT

FRONT SEATS

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Illustration of a car seat with a highlighted seat and yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

HFC2024

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull the lock release lever upward. This will release the seat on its track so you can move it forward or rearward to the desired position. When you find the position you want, release the lever and slide the seat forward or rearward on its track until it locks into the desired position and cannot be moved further.

WARNING:

To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever.

B08DC01A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Illustration of a car seat with a highlighted component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

To recline the seatback, lean forward to take your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner control lever at the outside edge of the seat.

Now lean back until the desired seatback angle is achieved. To lock the seatback into position, release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:

To minimize risk of severe injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop, both the driver and passenger seatbacks should always be in an upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags in a frontal collision may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined. There is greater risk that the driver and passenger will slide under the seat belt which may result in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The seat belt cannot provide full protection to an occupant if the seat back is reclined.

B000D03A-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Lock Knob HFC2028

Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries.

To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower the headrest, push it down while pressing the lock knob.

WARNING:

Illustration of a person seated in an office chair (no text or symbols visible)

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback should not be recommended.
Do not operate vehicle with the headrests removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion.

B080E010-AAT

Lumbar Support Control (Driver's seat only) (If Installed)

Diagram of a car seat with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or force

HFC2027

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle on the outboard or left side of the seat. To increase the amount of lumbar support, pull the lever forward. To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.

1. Maximum support
2. Minimum support

B080FD1S-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

Illustration of a car seat with two gear icons and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

HFC2026

To raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion, turn the front knob forward or rearward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion, turn the rear knob forward or rearward.

B08DG01FC-GAT

UNDER TRAY (If installed)

3D rendered mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

The tray is located under the front passenger seat. It is opened by up and pulling forward.

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the tray should be kept closed when the car is in motion.

B0B0H01FC-GAT

REAR SEAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Diagram showing car seat positioning with a device and directional arrow labeled 'start' indicating movement or orientation.

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull the lock release lever upward. This will release the seat on its track so you can move it forward or rearward to the desired position. When you find the position you want, release the lever and slide the seat forward or rearward on its track until it locks into the desired position and cannot be moved further.

B000101FC-BAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Seatback tolding lever HFC2061

To recline the seatback, push the seatback folding lever toward the head-rest, and release it after the desired seatback angle is achieved.

When you recline the seatback to desired position, always be sure it has locked into position.

CAUTION:

When reclining the seatback angle, you should be adjust the seatback folding lever with standing.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

18

B090A02FC-GAT

Adjustable Headrests (If Installed)

Lock Knob

Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries.

To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the lock knob.

WARNING:

Illustration of a woman seated in a chair, wearing a collared shirt (no text or symbols visible)

o For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback should not be recommended.

Do not operate vehicle with the headrests removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion.

B000B01FC-GAT

Folding Rear Seatback and Seat Cushion

For greater convenience, the entire seatback and seat cushion may be folded down and up.

Seatback folding lever HFC2074

1. Move the rear seat to the rearmost position.

2. Remove the headrests.

3. To fold down the seatback, push and hold the seatback folding lever toward the headrest, then push down the seatback.

Seat cushion release lever HFC2075

1. Pull the seat cushion release lever upward, then fold up the seat cushion.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage, ensure that the rear drinkholder, located in the rear console, is closed before folding the rear seatback and seat cushion.

Securing strap HFC2076

1. To secure the seat, hook the securing strap under the seat cushion to the headrest stay of front driver and passenger seat.
2. Insert the removed headrests between the seatback and seat cushion, so that they will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.
3. To return the seatback and seat cushion to its normal position, reverse the above procedure.
   When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it is locked into position by pulling and pushing on the top of seatback.

WARNING:

When you return the folded down seat back to its upright position, make sure the seat belts are in position to be accessible and to function properly.
The purpose of the fold down rear seat back and the fold forward rear seat cushion is to increase cargo space. Do not allow passengers to sit in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use when the seat back is folded down. Passengers who are not properly seated and wearing seat belts could sustain serious injuries or death in case of an accident or a sudden stop.
o Objects should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

20

SEAT WARMER

When you return the folded down seatback to its upright position, always be sure to install the headrests in their proper positions. Headrests are important to the safety of occupants in a rear collision. If the headrests are not installed in their proper position, serious injury or death could result if a rear end collision occurs.

B100A02FC-GAT

(If Installed)

Close-up of a car dashboard with control panel and handle (no visible text or symbols)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. When the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:

The seat warmer will not operate if ambient temperature is warm enough.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to injure by low temperature burn or an attack of fever as following occupants; infants, children, old man, drunken man, people who is taken sleeping drug or cold remedy.

REAR SEAT WARNING

B140A01B-GAT

Rear view of a silver SUV with a yellow prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the car or background)

For the safety of all passengers, luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the top of the seatback.

SEAT BELTS

B150A02A-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

All occupants of the vehicle should wear their seat belts at all times. Indeed, your province's laws may require that some or all occupants of the vehicle use seat belts.

The possibility of injury or the severity of injury in an accident will be decreased if this elementary safety precaution is observed. In addition, follow the other instructions provided in this section.

B150B01Y-GAT

Infant or Small Child

Some countries require the use of child restraint systems for infants and small children. Whether this is required by law or not, it is strongly recommended that a child restraint seat or infant restraint system be used for infants or small children weighing less than 18 kilograms (40 pounds).

NOTE:

Small children are best protected in an accident when properly restrained by a child restraint system.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

21

B150C03A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children under the age of 13 should be restrained securely in the rear seat. Never place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

22

B150D01S-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. When a seat belt is used, it should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a physician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident, and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:

Sitting in a reclined position or lying down when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seat belts can't do their job when you're reclined. The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it with great force, receiving serious neck or other injuries. The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be applied there, not at your strong pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit back in the seat and wear your seat belt properly. See page 1-24.

B180A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:

When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

B160001A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to your Hyundai Dealer.

B170A04A-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER BELT (If Installed)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt buckle with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety. If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck.

B160801A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

24

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the height adjuster button.

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING:

o The height adjuster must be in the locked position when the vehicle is moving.
o The misadjustment of height of the shoulder belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.

B180A03Y-GAT

SEAT BELTS

Driver's and passenger's 3-Point System with Webbing Clamp Locking Retractor (If installed) To Fasten Your Belt

Illustration of a person using a bandage device to adjust the knee area (no text or symbols present)

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around.

If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. Check to make sure that the belt is properly locked and that the belt is not twisted.

B180A02A-GAT

SEAT BELTS

3-Point System with Emergency Locking Retractor (If installed) To Fasten Your Belt

Illustration of a person performing CPR on a patient's seat, with a yellow flame symbol indicating pressure (no text or symbols present)

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. Check to make sure that the belt is properly locked and that the belt is not twisted.

B200A01S-GAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

Illustration of a person seated on a chair with a bandage, no text or symbols present

You should place the belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If the belt is located too high on your body, you could slide under it in case of accident or a sudden stop. This could result of death, serious injury or property damage. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest to the door.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

Illustration of a person performing a medical or physical procedure on a patient's abdomen (no text or symbols visible)

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

26

B220A01A-AAT

SEAT BELTS

2-Point Static Type

(Rear Seat Center) (If Installed)

To Fasten Your Seat Belt

Illustration of hands holding a small object with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert the metal tab into the locking buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. Check to make sure the belt is properly locked and that the belt is not twisted.

B22001A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

Shorten Too high Correct HTB225

With a 2-point static type seat belt, the length must be adjusted manually so it fits snugly around your body. Fasten the belt and pull on the loose end to tighten. The belt should be placed as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If the belt is too high, it could increase the possibility of your being injured in an accident.

B220C01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

Interior view of a vehicle showing seatbelt and rearview panel (no text or symbols visible)

When you want to release the seat belt, press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:

The center lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts or the center lap belt, make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation.

B220A01FC-GAT

SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat 3-Point System With Emergency Locking Retractor (If installed)

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with labeled parts (a), (b), (c), and (d) for identification

1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt, confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are latched together.
2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched, pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

Illustration of a person wearing a belt and holding a tool, with no visible text or symbols

WARNING:

When using the rear seat center belt, you must lock all metal tabs and buckles. If any metal tab or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) with the following exceptions.
(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down.
(2)If transporting an object on the rear seat may cause damage to the rear seat center belt.
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) immediately after folding rear seatbacks up.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

28

To Release the Seat Belt

Interior view of a car seatbelt with two gray straps attached (no text or symbols visible)

When you want to release the seat belt, press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:

The center belt latching mechanism is different from those for the rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts or the rear seat center belt, make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation.

B230A03A-GAT

(If Installed)

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle you must put them in a child restraint system (safety seat). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING:

o A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat.
Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus, only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.
o Since a safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.
When the child restraint system is not in use, fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should will sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the outboard lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the center seat lap belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips and as snug as possible.
If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, Hyundai recommends the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
o Never use an infant carrier or child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt.
o If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

B235G01A-GAT

Installation on Center Rear Seats

2 Point static type B235G02Y

3 Point type B235G01FC

Use the center seat belt for the rear to secure the child restraint system as illustrated.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

30

After installation of the child restraint system, rock the child seat back and forth, and side to side to ensure that it is properly secured by the seat belt. If the child seat moves, readjust the length of the seat belt. Then, if equipped, insert the child restraint tether strap hook into the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Always refer to the child restraint system manufacturer's recommendation before installing the child restraint system in your vehicle.

B230G01A-GAT

Installation on the Outboard Rear Seats

Side-by-side illustration of a car seatbelt and passenger seatbelt, showing no text or symbols.

To install a child restraint system on the outboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt from its retractor. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child's head or neck. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.

NOTE:

Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:

Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger's side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle.

B230B02A-GAT

Using a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is strongly recommended. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further recommended that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided three child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.

B230E02FC-GAT

Securing a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are located on the vertical back panel (behind rear bumper bar).

1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

Covering shelf Attaching clip Back panel Front of Vehicle B230F01FC

1. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

32

WARNING:

To install the child restraint seat, for safety reasons the Seat should be positioned rearmost with the seatback in a vertical position, not reclined.

B230D03FC-AAT

Securing a Child Restraint System with "ISOFIX" System and "Tether Anchorage" System

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, side, and interior compartments (no text or symbols)

ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo /

Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is approved according to the requirement ECE-R44. This seat has been tested extensively by Hyundai and is recommended for your Hyundai.

NOTE:

At present, this seat is the only one complying with that provision. In case that other manufacturers will furnish proof of a respective certification, Hyundai is going to evaluate this seat carefully and will give a recommendation provided that seat complies to the law. Please ask your Hyundai dealer in this respect.

ISOFIX Anchor

B230002FC-1

On each side of the rear seat, between the cushion and backrest, are located a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting on the luggage compartment. During the installing, the seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in a way you can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed with the Top Tetherbelt on the belonging point in the luggage-compartment. The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installing-manual, which is added to the ISOFIX-seat, while using the ISOFIX-child-seat, the rear-bench not allowed to be moved beyond the middle position to the forward direction.

NOTE:

An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be installed if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-seat, which was bought for another car, ask your Hyundai-dealer whether this seat-type is approved and recommended for your Hyundai.

To secure the child restraint seat

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with yellow arrows indicating features, shown from two different angles (no text or symbols present)

1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Refer to "Securing a Child Restraint System with the Tether Anchorage System" on page 1-31.

WARNING:

Do not install a child restraint seat at the center of the rear seat using the vehicle's outboard rear seat ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death.

o When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death.
o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration.
o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

E230H04A-GYT

Child Seat Restaint Suitability for Seat Position

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

Age Group	Seating Position
	Front Passenger	Rear Outboard	Rear Center
0 : Up to 10 kg(0 ~ 9 months)	X	U	X
0+: Up to 13 kg(0 ~ 2 years)	X	U	X
I: 9kg to 18kg(9 months -4 years)	X U, L1	UF
II & III : 15kg to 36kg(4 ~ 12 years)	X	U	F

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this group
L1: Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1" a proved for use in this group (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this group.

U F

B180B01A-GAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If Installed)

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pretensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated with the airbags.

Illustration of two people inside a car, one seated and one standing, with directional arrows indicating seatbelt (no text or symbols)

The pre-tensioner seat belt operates in a similar same way as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) type of seat belt. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system Driver's airbag 1

Passenger's airbag 3 2 B180B010

consists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light
2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module

WARNING:

tain maximum benefit from tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the correct position.

NOTE:

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36

Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated with the airbags. The pretensioners will be activated under these conditions even if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision.

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which the pretensioner seat belts were activated.

CAUTION:

Cause the sensor that activates the SRS airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warning light on the instrument panel will link for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the "ON" position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or if it remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING:

- tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision.

The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.
Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner.
o Improper handling of the pre-

SUPPLEMENTAL RE-STRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM

B240A03F-GAT

(If Installed)

Driver's Airbag

Driver's Airbag steering wheel (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.

Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional pro-

tection than that offered by the seat belt system alone, in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

NOTE:

Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the backside of the sun visor and in the glove box.

WARNING:

As its name implies, the SRS is designed to work with, and be supplemental to, the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

The SRS is designed to deploy the airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30^ from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle and will not deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once. Thus, seat belts must be worn at all times.

Side Impact Rollover Rear impact B240C01FC

o Front airbags are not intended to deploy In side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, airbags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold speed.

o The driver should sit back as far as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. If you are sitting too close to the airbag, it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates.
o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to deploy.
o If the airbags deploy, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in Injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an accident.

Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If older children (teenagers and older) must ride in the front seat, make sure they are always properly belted and that the seat is moved back as far as possible.
For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag while the vehicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

B240G01FC-GAT

SRS Components and Functions

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, holding an object, with no visible text or symbols.

The SRS consists of the following components:

• Driver's Airbag Module
• Passenger's Airbag Module
• SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
• SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment.

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which the SRI should go out.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat with arms extended, no text or symbols present

The airbag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a considerable impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the airbags.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

40

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols present)

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags.

A fully inflated airbag in combination with a properly worn seat belt slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, thus reducing the risk of head or chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility.

CAUTION: Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

Passenger's Airbag B240804FC

CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, Instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

Passenger's Airbag ES240302SL

WARNING:

When the SRS is activated, there may be a loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. Wash your hands and face thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed.
o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS SRI does not come on, or continuously remains on, after flashing for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position or remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI to illuminate.

099004Y-GAT

Side Impact Airbag (If Installed)

Line drawing of a person sitting in a car, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side airbag in each front seat.

The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seatbelt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Side airbag sensor HFC2092

WARNING:

The side impact airbag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.
For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat covers.

o Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
o Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag.
o Do not use excessive force on the side of the seat.
o Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself.
Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact air bag inflates.
To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.

B240C03Y-GAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. The entire SRS system must be inspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer 10 years after the date that the vehicle was manufactured.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

B240C01HP

WARNING:

o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position.
A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident.

o Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate.
o If the airbags Inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

If components of the airbag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start engine; have the car towed to authorized Hyundai dealer.
Do not replace the bumper or the bumper guard with the one other than the Hyundai genuine parts. Otherwise, it can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to unexpected injury.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR

B260A02FC-GAT GASOLINE ENGINE

1 2 3 4 5 6 x1000rpm 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 km/h ESP OFF P R N D 2 L ESP OD OFF IMP BRAKE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 OR AIR BAG

B260A02FC

1. Temperature Gauge

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Digital Clock

5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (If installed)

6. Fuel Gauge

7. Turn Signal Indicator Light

8. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (Auto T/A only)

9. Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If installed)

10. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light (If installed)

11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)/Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

12. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Auto T/A only)

13. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

14. Charging System Warning Light

15. Low Fuel Warning Light

16. High Beam Indicator Light

17. Tail Gate Open Warning Light

18. Door Ajar Warning Light

19. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

20. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If installed)

21. Seat Belt Warning Light (If installed)

22. ABS Warning Light (If installed)

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46

B260B02FC-GAT

DIESEL ENGINE

1 2 3 4 5 6 x1000rpm 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 km/h ESP OFF ESP BRAKE Air Bag 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

B260B02FC

1. Temperature Gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Speedometer
4. Digital Clock
5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (If installed)
6. Fuel Gauge
7. Fuel Filter Warning Light
8. Turn Signal Indicator Light
9. Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If installed)
10. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light (If installed)

11. Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light

12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)/Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

13. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
14. Charging System Warning Light
15. Low Fuel Warning Light
16. High Beam Indicator Light
17. Tail Gate Open Warning Light
18. Door Ajar Warning Light
19. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
20. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If installed)
21. Seat Belt Warning Light (If installed)
22. ABS Warning Light (If installed)

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal system is indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs.

B260U01TB-GAT

Immobilizer Indicator Light (If installed)

This indicator light comes on for some seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. At this time, you can start the engine. The light goes out after the engine is running. In case this light goes out before you start the engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" position and restart the engine. In case this light blinks for five seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON" position, this indicates that the immobilizer system is out of order.

At this time, refer to the explanation of the Limp home procedure(See page 1-6) or consult to the Hyundai dealer.

B260B01S-GAT

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes on and flashes for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly. If the SRI does not come on, or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B280C02E-GAT

TCS Traction Control Indicator Light (If Installed)

The traction control indicator changes operation according to the ignition switch position and whether or not the system is in operation.

It will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and then go off in a few seconds. If the TCS indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS system.

B285C01LZ-AAT

Electronic Stability Program Indicator Lights (If Installed)

The electronic stability program indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not.

They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFF indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the ESP.

B260C01A-AAJ

O/D OFF Indicator Light (If Installed)

When the overdrive switch is turned on, the overdrive off indicator will go out. This amber indicator will be illuminated when the overdrive switch is turned off. (Auto T/A only)

B260H0GA-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

WARNING:

If you suspect brake trouble, have your brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Driving your car with a problem in either the brake electrical system or brake hydraulic system is dangerous, and could result in a serious injury or death.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake / low brake fluid level warning light should come on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START". After the engine is started, the light should go out when the parking brake is released.

If the parking brake is not applied, the warning light should come on when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START", then go out when the engine starts. If the light comes on at any other time, you should slow the vehicle and bring it to a complete stop in a safe location off the roadway.

The brake warning light indicates that the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is found, the car should be immediately and carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer by a professional towing service.

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a distance with only half of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50

B260J01S-GAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should come on when the ignition is turned on, then go out when the engine is running. If the light stays on while the engine is running, there is a malfunction in the electrical charging system. If the light comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the engine and check under the hood. First, make certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is, check the tension of the belt.

And then, have the system checked by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:

If the drive belt (generator belt) is loosen, broken, or mission while the vehicle is driving, there may be a serious malfunction, engine could overheat because this belt also drives the water pump.

B260M01A-AA7

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on when the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter.

B26DF01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on whenever the headlights are switched to the high beam or flash position.

B260K01B-GAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate is completely closed.

B260LD1A-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light

The door ajar warning light warns you that a door is not completely closed.

B20G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:

If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there may be a serious malfunction.

If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer before the car is driven again.

B260N02FC-GAT

Malfunction Indicator Light (If installed)

This light illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component, and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. This light will illuminate when the ignition key is tuned to the "ON" position, and then it will go out after the engine start. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked.

B260E01HP-GAT

Seat Belt Warning Light (If installed)

The seat belt warning light blinks for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START".

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52

B260P02Y-GAT

(ABS) ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will come on and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

WARNING:

If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on while driving, there may be a problem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake Force Distribution).

If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B265A01FC-GAT

Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Engine)

This light illuminates when the engine has started and goes off after a few seconds. If it lights up while the engine is running, it indicates that water has accumulated inside the fuel filter. If this happens, remove the water from the fuel filter. (Refer to "6-34 page")

B280S01B-GAT

Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel Engine)

The indicator light illuminates amber when the ignition switch is placed at the "ON" position. The engine can be started after the pre-heat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery condition.

NOTE:

If the engine were not started 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "ON" position, in order to preheat again.

B900A01A-GAT

LIGHTS ON WARNING SOUND (If Installed)

The warning chime sounds when the tail lights are on and the driver side door is open. This prevents the battery from discharging by warning you when the car is left with the tail lights on. The chime sounds until the tail lights are turned off.

B270B02C-GAT

PARKING START WARNING SOUND (If installed)

If the vehicle is driven at 10km/h(6mph) for more than 2\~3 seconds, the warning chime will sound continuously when the parking brake engaged.

B270A01A-AAT

The front disc brake pads have wear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise when new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. It may also be heard when the brake pedal is pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damage will result if the worn pads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealer immediately.

B950A01E-GAT

REAR FOG AUDIBLE WARNING SOUND (If Installed)

The rear fog audible warning chime sounds when the rear fog lights are on and the door in driver side is open.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B260A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

F F HFC2045

The needle on the gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.

B290A02E-AAT

Diagram of a droplet with a curved tube and labeled point H, no text or symbols present

WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could erupt and cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before removing the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant temperature gauge should stay in the middle between "H" and "C". If it moves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then open the hood and after the engine has cooled, check the coolant level and the water pump drive belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, have your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B300A01A-GAT SPEEDOMETER

80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 km/h HFC2N4

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour or miles per hour.

B30A02A-AAT TACHOMETER

Gasoline engine x1000rpm HFC2043

Diesel engine x1000rpm B330A01FC

The tachometer registers the speed of your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION: The engine should not be raced to such a speed that the needle enters the red zone on the tachometer face. This can cause severe engine damage and may void your warranty.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56

B310801FC-GAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

Without Trip Computer ODO TRIP A B 000000.0 Reset Switch HFC2089

With Trip Computer 88:88 km/h ODO TRIP [A] B 888888 KM Reset Switch HFC2051

Function of digital odometer/trip odometer

pushing in the reset switch when the ignition switch is turned "ON" will display the following sequence:

① ODO 123.4 ② TRIP A 34.7 ③ TRIF B 8.0 HFC2000

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distance in kilometers or miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Any alteration of the odometer may void your warranty coverage.

2,3. Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in kilo- meters or miles.

TRIP A: First distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination. TRIP B: Second distance from the first destination to the final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the reset switch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset to 0.

TRIP COMPUTER

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

57

B400B01FC-GAT

(If Installed)

8:8:8.8 km/h ODO TRIP (A)(B) 888888.8 KM Reset Switch HFC2051

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays information related to driving, such as a distance to empty, average speed and drive time on the LCD.

Reset switch

o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-functional display mode.
o Pushing in the reset switch changes the display as follows;

graph TD
    A["DISTANCE TO EMPTY"] --> B["AVERAGE SPEED"]
    B --> C["DRIVE TIME"]
    C --> A

1. Distance to Empty

Distance to empty symbol 300 Distance to empty HFC2052

This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel in the fuel tank and distance to empty symbol.
o When refueling with more than 6 liters, the trip computer will recognize refueling.
When the battery has been reinstalled after being discharged or disconnected, drive more than 32km for an accurate distance to empty.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58

NOTE:

o If the distance to empty is indicated "- -", have the trip computer system checked by your authorized Hyundai dealer.
o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions.
o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving pattern or vehicle speed.

2. Average speed

Average speed symbol 12.3 km/h Average speed HFC2063

This mode indicates the average speed travelled since the last average speed reset.
o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero.

3. Drive time

Drive time symbol 8 0:0 0 Drive time HFC2054

o This mode indicates the drive time travelled since the last drive time reset.
o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the drive time is being displayed, clears the drive time to zero.

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM SWITCH

Turn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turn signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is completed, the lever will automatically return to the center position and turn off the turn signals at the same time. If either turn signal indicator light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is a malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

Illustration of a hand holding an electric plug with yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to a point where it begins flashing.

The lever will automatically return to the center position when released.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

59

B340C00FC-GAT

Headlight Switch

Illustration of a hand holding an electric plug with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. The first position turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail lights and instrument panel lights. The second position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:

The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60

Parking light auto cut (If installed)

o The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged.

The system automatically turns off the small light when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.

o With this feature, the parklight will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following :

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push the lever forward (away from you). The high beam indicator light will come on at the same time. For low beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B34DF01A-GAT

Daytime Running Lights (If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with daytime running lights. The daytime running lights are used to improve visibility for oncoming traffic. Your vehicle daytime running lights are designed to remain on continuously when the engine is operating even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position. However, the daytime running lights will be off while the parking brake is applied.

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

Illustration of a hand holding a medical or laboratory device with a yellow arrow pointing to the tip (no text or symbols present)

To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever toward you, then release it. The headlights can be flashed even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

1 2 3 B350ACHFC

The windshield wiper switch has three positions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation
2. Low-speed operation
3. High-speed operation

NOTE:

To prevent damage to the wiper system, do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice, operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

B350D01C-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. When the washer lever is operated, the wipers automatically make two passes across the windshield. The washer continues to operate until the lever is released.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

61

NOTE:

o Do not operate the washer more than 15 seconds at a time or when the fluid reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in winter, use windshield washer antifreeze.

Mist Wiper Operation

Close-up of a metallic cylindrical device with a yellow arrow pointing to its top section (no visible text or symbols)

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist, push the windshield wiper and washer control lever upwards.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62

B350C01FC-GAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation (If Installed)

Hand holding a handheld electronic device with a probe, showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the switch in this position, the interval between wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18 seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.

B350A01O-AAT

Tail Gate Wiper And Washer Switch

Close-up of a handheld electronic device with two circular arrows indicating rotation or adjustment (no text or symbols visible)

1. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper operates while the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position.

2.OFF

3.INT: To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the rear window wiper barrel in the "INT" position.

4.ON: When the point indicates "ON", the rear window wiper operates continuously.

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

Car dashboard interface screenshot showing steering wheel, infotainment panel, and warning sign with triangle symbol

The hazard warning system should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition.

To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch a second time.

FRONT/REAR WINDOW DE- FROSTER SWITCH

B300A03HP-AAT

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and control panel with a device labeled 'HFC2080'

The front/rear window defroster and heated outside rear view mirrors are turned on by pushing in the switch. At the same time, the front/rear window defroster indicator light on the switch is turned on. To turn the defroster off, push the switch a second time. The front/rear window defroster automatically turns itself off after about 20 minutes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the switch again after it has turned itself off.

CAUTION:

Do not clean the inner side of the front/rear window glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from the inner surface of the glass as this may cause damage to the defroster elements.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the front/rear window defroster to operate.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

63

B380B01FC-GAT

Front fog light switch (If Installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch in the "ON" position. They will come on when the headlight switch is in the first or second position.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64

B380A01Y-GAT

Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed)

Diagram of car air conditioner control panel with Chinese label pointing to the function button

To turn on the rear fog lights, push the switch. They will come on when the headlight switch is in the second position and the key is in the "ON" position.

HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM

B340G01FC-GAT

(If Installed)

Diagram of a car air conditioner control panel with labeled buttons and a magnified view of the device.

To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch. The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users. Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.

Loading condition	Switch position
Driver only	0
Driver + front passenger	0
Full passengers (including driver)	1
Full passengers (including driver) + Maximum permissible loading	2
Driver + Maximum permissible loading	3

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

12:00 HFC2091

There are three control buttons for the digital clock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated.

MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.

RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10:30 and 11:

29 changes the readout to 11:00.

Pressing "R" between 11:30 and 12:

29 changes the readout to 12:00.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A02A-AAT

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a handle and vent (no text or symbols)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element has heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This can damage the heating element and create a fire hazard.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its approved equivalent.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

65

CAUTION:

Do not use electric accessories or equipment other than the Hyundai genuine parts in the socket.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

66

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

These supply 12V electric power to operate electric accessories or equipment only when the key is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION:

- Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using when the engine stops or keeping the electric device with plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to discharge. - Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12 volts.

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle.

B430A01FC-GAT

Interior view of a car showing a yellow arrow pointing to the side panel, with no visible text or symbols.

The ashtray may be opened by pulling the lid up by its top edge. To remove the ashtray to empty or clean it, pull the cover up all the way out. The ashtray light will only illuminate when the external lights are on.

DRINK HOLDER

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

67

B450A02FC-GAT

Front drink holder

(If Installed)

Driver's Passenger's HFC2097

The front drink holder is used for holding cups.

To use the passenger's drink holder, push the drink holder and pull it entirely.

B450G02FC-GAT

Rear drink holder

(If Installed)

Two views of a food storage machine with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

The rear drink holder is located on the rear main console for holding cups. The drink holder can be used by pushing the knob on the rear main console downward and then releasing it.

CAUTION:

Place the drink holder in its original position while not in use.

WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage Interior trim and electrical components.
Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. These objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68

PARKING BRAKE

B530A02A-AAT

Mechanical component with a yellow arrow and label 'B630A01FC' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

The parking brake must always be set when the vehicle is to be left unattended. When the parking brake is applied, and the ignition key is at the "ON" position, the parking brake warning lamp will be illuminated. Before driving the vehicle, the parking brake must be fully released and the warning lamp extinguished.

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible.

In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the Park position on automatic transaxle vehicles.

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly, depress the release button and lower the parking brake lever while holding the button.

CAUTION:

Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.

REAR SEAT ARM REST

B611A02FC-AAT

(If Installed)

Interior view of a car seat assembly showing front and side views (no text or symbols)

The rear seat arm rest is located in the center of the rear seat back with a storage box.

The drink holder in the box can be used by opening the lid of the arm rest.

WARNING:

Do not place objects other than cups or cans on the drink holder. Such objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
o Be careful not to injure your fingers when you open the lid of the arm rest.

SUNROOF

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

69

B460A01S-AA7

(If installed)

The sunroof can be operated with the ignition key in the "ON" position

B470A02S-AAT

SUNSHADE

Interior view of a car showing dashboard, front panel, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

The sunshade can be opened and closed by sliding it forward or rearward when the sunroof is closed. The sunshade will be open automatically when the sunroof is opened, but it must be closed manually.

WARNING:

Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B460B02S-AAT

Opening or Closing the Sunroof

号园 HFC2021

The sunroof can be only electrically opened or closed. To open or to close, press and hold the button located in the front overhead console.

Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position.

CAUTION:

o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold temperature or when it is covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails.
Do not press any sunroof control button longer than necessary. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

WARNING:

Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands, arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as this could result in an injury.
Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70

B480C02S-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof

HFC2022

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing the "UP" button with the sunroof closed. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the sunroof, press the "DOWN" button.

NOTE:

After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

B480D01FC-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not operate electrically:

Hand using a tool to adjust or install a car interior panel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior light lens in the front overhead console.

2. Turn the hexagonal bolts with a socketwrench counterclockwise to remove the front overhead console.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a tool inserted, showing internal compartments and a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's luggage room or glove box.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted component and yellow warning symbol (no text or labels)

1. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close.

INTERIOR LIGHT

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

71

B480A01E-AAT FRONT INTERIOR LIGHT Map Light

With Sunroof Without Sunroof HFC480

The two map light switches are located on both sides of the front overhead console. Push in the map light switch to turn the light on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map light at night or as a personal light for the driver and the passenger.

B490A02E-AAT Interior Light

With Sunroof Without Sunroof HFC490

The interior courtesy light has a switch of three positions. The three positions are:

o DR

In the "DR" position, the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes out when the door is closed.

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all times.

CAUTION:

Do not leave the switch in this position for an extended period time when the vehicle is not running.

o OFF

In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all times even though a door is open.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72

SPECTACLE CASE

B491A02FC-GAT

(If Installed)

Two identical gray rectangular objects with a yellow arrow pointing to one, side by side (no text or symbols)

The spectacle case is located on the front overhead console.

Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle case.

MULTI BOX

B500B02E-GAT

Diagram showing a car interior with a yellow arrow pointing to the door panel (no text or symbols present)

The multi box may be opened by pulling it out by its grip.

It is used for storing small articles. If the multi box is removed, the fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be exposed.

ACCESSORY TRAY

B520A01FC-GAT

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and driver shift (no visible text or symbols)

The accessory tray may be opened by pushing the knob sidewards and releasing slowly it.

It is used for storing small items.

WARNING:

Do not open the spectacle case while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle may be blocked by an open spectacle case.

GLOVE BOX

MIRROR

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

73

B500A01A-AAT

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

B510001FC-GAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR Electric Type

Close-up of a car dashboard with control buttons and a handle (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box door should be kept closed when the car is in motion.

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted to your preferred rear vision, both directly behind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and right sides. The remote control outside rearview mirror switch controls the adjustments for both right and left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left to activate the adjustable mechanism for the corresponding door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appropriate directional switch as illustrated.

Circular mechanical component with yellow directional arrows indicating left and right sides (no text or symbols)

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74

CAUTION:

o Do not operate the switch continuously for an unnecessary length of time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face could cause permanent damage. To remove any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or approved de-icer.

WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface, and objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear.

B510002HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER (If Installed)

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and control panel with a highlighted device labeled 'HFC2010'

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the front/rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in the switch for the front/rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS

Diagram of a car's side mirror and door mechanism, showing yellow motion arrows (no text or symbols)

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them towards the rear. The outside rearview mirrors can be folded rearward for parking in narrow areas.

WARNING:

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

SUN VISOR

75

B520A01A-AAT

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

Manual Type

3D rendered image of a car rearview mirror with a yellow warning symbol (no text or labels)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside rearview mirror. The "night" position is selected by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of headlights of cars behind you is reduced.

B580A01L-GAT

(If Installed)

Vanity mirror HFC2094

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give the driver and front passenger either frontal or sideward shade. The sun visors are fitted on both sides on all models. To reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down to block the annoyance. A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sun visor for the driver and front passenger.

NOTE:

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) label containing useful information can be found on the back of each sun visor.

WARNING:

Do not place the sun visor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or other objects.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

FOLD-UP TRAY

B810A01FC-GAT

Illustration of a kitchen appliance with a tray and handle, showing a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

For your convenience, it may be used as a table holding a book, cup or can.

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the fold-up tray should be place its original position while the vehicle is moving.

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT (If installed)

Rear view of a silver SUV with a roof-mounted roof, viewed from the side (no visible text or symbols)

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stop lights on either side of the car, the high mounted rear stop light in the center of the rear window or inserted in the rear spoiler also lights when the brakes are applied.

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01FC-GAT

Interior view of a car showing the door panel and a yellow checkmark on the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

Illustration of a car with a yellow hand pointing to a pair of shoes on the roof, no text or symbols present.

1. Push the secondary latch lever sidewards and lift the hood.

2. Hold the hood open with the support rod.

Before closing the hood, return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm (1 ft.) above the closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it locks into place.

CAUTION:

Make sure that the support rod has been released prior to closing the hood.

WARNING:

o Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
o The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided in the hood whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.
Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged.

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE

B560ADSA-AAT

77

Illustration of a car with an electric plug inserted into the window, showing airflow direction (no text or symbols)

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener located on the front floor area on the left side of the car.

NOTE:

If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78

3D diagram of a device with internal components and a globe, no visible text or symbols

WARNING:

o Fuel vapors are dangerous. Before refueling, always stop the engine and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler area. If you need to replace the filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part.

If you open the fuel filler cap during high ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern.

Whenever you open the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully.

- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel filler cap, have one's hands in contact with metal parts away from the filler neck to discharge static electricity.

- Do not get back in the vehicle while refueling. Do not operate anything that can produce static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in an explosion.

- When using a portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground while refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. While starting refueling, contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

• Do not use cellular phones around a gas station. The electric current or electronic interference from cellular phones can ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.
• When refueling, always turn the engine off. Sparks by electrical equipment of the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. After refueling, check to make sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed, and then start the engine.
• Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes around a gas station. Automotive fuels are flammable.

TAIL GATE

B540A01FC-GAT

LOCK UNLOCK ES40A02FC

WARNING:

The tail gate should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car resulting in serious illness or death to the occupants. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

CD AUTO CHANGER

79

o The tail gate can be locked or unlocked with a key.
o The tail gate is opened by pulling the outside handle up, raising the tail gate manually.
To close, lower the tail gate, then press down on it until it is closed. To be sure the tail gate is fully closed, always try to pull it up again without using the outside handle.

B600A02FC-GAT

(If Installed)

Technical illustration of a car seat assembly (no text or symbols)

The CD Auto Changer is located under the front passenger seat. This system can store up to 8 CDs.

You may select music without changing discs. First, open the CD Auto Changer door, remove the CD "magazine" and insert up to 8 CDs. Then, push the magazine into the CD Auto Changer. The CD may be operated with the passenger compartment audio system controls.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80

LUGGAGE NET

WARNING:

Never attempt to change CDs the already inserted in the CD changer magazine while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident that may cause death, serious insury, or property damage.

B540D03FC-GAT

(If Installed)

Technical illustration of a car seat and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

Some objects can be kept in the net in the luggage compartment. Use the luggage net on the floor or at the back of the luggage compartment to prevent objects from sliding.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING:

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face and body out of its recoil path. DO NOT use when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

CARGO AREA COVER

B850A01FC-GAT

(If installed)

Illustration of a car trunk with a canopy cover, showing a small inset image of a vehicle's seat (no text or symbols present)

Nothing should be carried on top of the luggage cover. Loose materials could result in injury to vehicle occupants during sudden braking.

ROOF RACK

B830A03FC-GAT

(If installed)

Side profile illustration of a car (no text or symbols visible)

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails and fixing components to adapt the roof rack on your vehicle may be obtained from an authorized Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:

o The following specifications are recommended when loading cargo or luggage.

ROOF RACK

34 kg (75 lb)EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

81

o Loading cargo or luggage above 34 kg (75 lb) on the roof rack may damage your vehicle. When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
To use the roof rails as a roof rack, you must fit the roof rails with two or more crossrails or equivalent before carrying cargo or luggage on the roof.
o When crossrail is adapted, you can load things on the roof rack.
o Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may damage stability of your vehicle.
o In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82

AUTO FUEL CUT SWITCH

B560B010-GAT

(Gasoline Engine)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a yellow component (no visible text or symbols)

The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment.

In the event of a collision or sudden impact, the auto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If this device is activated, it must be reset by pressing in on the top of the switch before the engine can be restarted.

WARNING:

Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch, the fuel line should be checked for fuel leaks.

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

B800A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and gear shift (no text or symbols visible)

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:

1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever by pulling it upward.

WARNING:

Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle which may cause serious injury or death.

HORN

B510001A-GAT

Circular diagram of a steering wheel with a yellow arrow indicating clockwise direction (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

With Airbag

Circular steering wheel with a yellow warning triangle on the steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Press the center hub of the steering wheel to sound the horn.

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

83

B710A01Y-GAT

(If installed)

1 2 3 4 1 2 Side Defrost Nozzle Side Ventilator Windshield Defrost Nozzle Center Ventilator

B710301A-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR

The center ventilators are located in the middle of the dashboard.

To change the direction of the air flow, turn the control knob on the middle of the ventilator as desired.

B710C01FC-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side of the dashboard. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to "≡" position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to

"☒". Keep these vents clear of any obstructions.

1. Side Defrost Nozzle
2. Side Ventilator
3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle
4. Center Ventilator

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B870A01FC-GAT

Rotary type (If installed)

1 2 3 4 HFC2064

This model has four controls for the heating and cooling system. They are:

1. Temperature control
2. Fan speed control
3. Air flow control
4. Air intake control

B670E01A-AAT

Temperature Control

A/C Cool Warm HFC2056

This control is used to adjust the degree of heating or cooling desired.

B670B01FC-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

Circular mechanical knob with numbered segments (0–4) and a central knob, no visible text or symbols beyond markings

This is used to turn the blower fan on or off and to select the fan speed.

This blower fan speed, and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" positions.

"1" is lowest and "4" is the highest fan speed.

B870D05A-AAT

Air Flow Control

Circular industrial control knob with directional arrows and a central car icon (no text or symbols)

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

HFC204B HFC2049

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air traffic indicators (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the side defrost nozzle windshield defrost vents and the floor vents. If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will be turn automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode will be activated.

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the side defrost nozzle, windshield defrost vents. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated to improve windshield defrosting.

HEATING CONTROLS

87

B670C03FC-GAT

Air Intake Control

Circular industrial control knob with yellow indicator lights and control buttons (no text or symbols)

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculating inside air.

To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.

FRESH MODE ( ) :

The indicator light on the button goes off when the air intake control is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ):

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in "Recirculation" mode will increase to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

B890A02S-AAT

A 0 1 2 3 4 B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B B600AD2FC

For normal heating operation, set the air intake control to the "Fresh" position and the air flow control to "Floor".

For faster heating, the air intake control should be in the "Recirculation" position.

If the windows fog up, move the air flow control to the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperature control to "Warm".

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88

VENTILATION DEFROSTING/DEFOGGINGBI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A01S-AAT

Three circular industrial control knob designs with no visible text or symbols

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating controls. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode (☐).
o Set the air flow control at the "Bi-Level" position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm".

B710A01S-AAT

Three circular industrial control knob designs with labeled terminals (no text or symbols beyond labels)

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode (☐).
To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents, set the air flow control to "Face".
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm".

B720A02FC-GAT

AFC HFC2107

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:

To remove interior fog on the wind-shield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost (💡) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

89

HFC2108

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost (") position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to warm. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:

When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level (☑) or defrost level (☑), it may cause fog to form on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position (☑) and fan speed control to the low position.

B730A01L-GAT

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control at "Recirculation". Be sure to return the control to "Fresh" when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air (💡) position, fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust temperature control to desired temperature.

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch (If installed)

HFC2069

The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

B740B01FC-GAT

Air Conditioning Operation Cooling

AC 1 2 3 4 7 BY40801FC

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing in on the switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the "Recirculation" position on the air intake control.
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".)
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".) o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the "Recirculation" position on the air intake control.

B740C01FC-GAT

Dehumidified Heating

Three circular industrial control knobs with yellow arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols on the knobs themselves)

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode (☐).
o Set the air flow control to the desired position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth.

B740001A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you first get in, open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air condition-ing system, keep all windows closed to keep hot air out.
When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear. This increases engine speed, which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning off to avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.
During winter months or in periods when the air conditioning is not used regularly, run the air conditioning once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92

AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01FC-AAT

(If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01FC-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control

2. Display Window

3. Blower Fan Control

4. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch

5. Air Flow Control Switch

6. Air Conditioning Switch

7. Air Intake Control Switch

8. Air Quality System Switch (If Installed)

9. Defroster Switch

10.OFF Switch

TYPE A (Without Air Quality System)

1 AUTO 2 AUTO 88.8°C CITURE -88°C 3 AUTO OFF 4 5 6 7 9 10

TYPE B (With Air Quality System)

1 2 3 4 AUTO 88.8°C OUTSIDE -88° 5 6 7 8 9 10 MAX AIC

HFC224-3

HFC224-2

B970C01NF-GAT

Automatic Operation

TEMP PUSH AUTO HFC227

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls heating and cooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and air conditioner will be controlled automatically.

TEMP PUSH AUTO HFC229

1. Turn the "TEMP" knob to set the desired temperature.

The temperature will increase to the maximum 32^(90^) by turning the knob clockwise.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum 17°C(62°F) by turning the knob counterclockwise.

NOTE:

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode will reset to Centigrade degrees.

This is a normal condition and you can change the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;

Press the "OFF" and "AUTO" switch simultaneously for 3 seconds.

The display shows that the unit of temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit (°C → °F or °F → °C).

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

94

Photo Sensor B970C01FC

NOTE:

Never place anything over the sensor which is located on the Instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

B900A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" switch. In this state, the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected.

The function of the switches which are not selected will be controlled automatically.

Press the "AUTO" switch in order to convert to automatic control of the system.

B900B01NF-AAT

Fan Speed Control

LOW HIGH PUSH OFF LO HI HFC225

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" switch turns off the fan.

B67DC0GY-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.Q.S)

HFC240

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation of inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control switch.

FRESH MODE (The indicator light on the button goes on when the air intake control is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE (☐): The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

B90004Y-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S) (If Installed)

Front view of a car air conditioning control panel with two rotary buttons and a digital display (no readable text or symbols)

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air automatically.

= :OFF

- : ON

二

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

96

Recirculation mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside. But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the outside, the exhaust gas cut-off mode ( ) is automatically converted to the ( ) mode, to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in recirculation mode (☐) will give rise to misting of the winds-hield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculation mode (☐) selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

CAUTION:

If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air intake control to the Fresh air position or A.Q.S control to "OFF".

B900D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

HFC259

Press the "OFF" switch to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system.

B900E01FC-GAT

Air Flow Control

A230 88.95 HFC230

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Four symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost position.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face-Level", the indicator light will come on, causing air to be discharged through the face level vents.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator.

B900F02E-GAT

Defrost Switch

AUTO 88pt AUTO

HFC241

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 3.5°C and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 3.5°C.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B780A05FC-AAT

Outside air Inside air Filter Inside air Blower fan Evaporator core Heater core

The climate control air filter is located in front of the blower unit behind the glove box. It operates to decrease pollutants from entering the car.

To replace the climate control air filter, refer to page 6-25.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

99

CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or once a year. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is suddenly decreased, the system should be checked at an authorized dealer.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

FM reception

Ionosphere

Illustration of a city skyline with cars and a question mark, no text or symbols present

B750AD1L

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures high quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges and other large obstructions in the area.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

AM reception Ionosphere B750A2DL

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station Mountains Unobstructed area Buildings Iron bridges Obstructed area B750403L

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

B750A04L

o Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station. o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

B750A0SL

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and a reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

B750B02Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

CAUTION:

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING:

Don't use a cellular phone when you are driving, you must stop at a safe place to use a cellular phone.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102

CAR AUDIO SYSTEMS

H210A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H210) (If Installed)

2. FADER Control Knob 5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 4. BAND Selector TUNE SEEK FM AM FM/AM TUNER RECEIVER BAL FULL VOL RUSH SCAN PULL BASS/TREEB 1 2 3 FM12 STAML 18:8.8 CH $1.50 PULL SYNTHESSED TUNER ON FAD 4 5 6 6. PRESET Station Select Button 3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

1. POWER ON-OFF, BALANCE, VOLUME, SCAN Control Knob

H2104010

H210B090-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Rotate the knob clockwise to switch the radio unit on and to increase the volume.

The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode. Turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume and to switch the radio unit off.

BAL (Balance Control) Knob

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

After adjusting the balance, push the knob again to use the other function.

SCAN Knob

When the scan knob is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan knob again.

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speakers sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone.

TREBLE Control Knob.

Further pull-lock position of popped-up knob. Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. BAND Selector

Pressing the FM AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. With the button held down for 1 sec. or more, the stop signal (broadcasting radio wave) is ignored and channel selection continues.

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec. or more. When the (∧) side is pressed, the unit will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the (∨) side is pressed, it will automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

6. PRESET STATION SELECT Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM1, and FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station.

A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button.

When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

B220A01E-BAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H220) (If Installed)

2. FADER Control Knob 5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 4. BAND Selector TUNE SEEK FM AM AUTO REVERSE BAL PULL VOL FUSH SCAN PULL BASS/TREB 1 2 3 4 5 6 FM12 STAML 18:8.8 CH# PULL SYNTHESIZED TUNER 6. PRESET Station Select Button 3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob POWER ON-OFF, BALANCE, VOLUME, SCAN Control Knob

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

H210B03O-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Rotate the knob clockwise to switch the radio unit on and to increase the volume.

The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode. Turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume and to switch the radio unit off.

BAL (Balance Control) Knob

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

After adjusting the balance, push the knob again to use the other function.

SCAN Knob

When the scan knob is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan knob again.

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone.

TREBLE Control Knob.

Further pull-lock position of popped-up knob. Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. BAND Selector

Pressing the FM AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. With the button held down for 1 sec. or more, the stop signal (broadcasting radio wave) is ignored and channel selection continues.

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec. or more. When the (∧) side is pressed, the unit will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the (√) side is pressed, it will automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

6. PRESET STATION SELECT Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM1, and FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station.

A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button.

When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108

B220C01E-BAT CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H220) (If Installed)

2. ELECT Button 3. TAPE SLOT 1. FF/REW Button TUNE SEEK FM AM AUTO REVERSE REV FF BAL PULL VOL PUSH SCAN PULL BASS/TREB 1 2 3 FM12 18:8.8 CH STAML 5 ON FAD 4 5 6 PULL SYNTHESIZED TURER

B200002E-BAT

1. FF/REW/PROGRAM button

Pushing the Fast-forward button will cause the tape to move rapidly in the forward direction of play. Pushing the Rewind button will cause the tape to move rapidly in the reverse direction of play.

To stop FF or REW action, press the opposite button.

This allows you to play the reverse side of the tape by merely depressing the FF and REW buttons simultaneously.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

2. TAPE EJECT button

While the tape is playing, press the eject button when you want to eject the cassette tape.

3. TAPE SLOT

Insert cassette with exposed tape side facing towards to cassette slot. Insertion of the cassette will automatically cut off the radio reception and tape playback will start.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

H260A01O-AAT STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob 4. SCAN Button 6. BAND Selector BASS/TREBE SCAN FM/AM CD TUNE DISC 1 2 3 4RPT 5 6 ST DISC RPT TRACK FM/2 CH AML PRESET Button 5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

1. FADER Control Knob

H2604010

H260B0GE-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode or the CD track indicator in either the CD mode or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.

BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speakers sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan button again.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. Press either button and hold down to continuously scroll. Release button once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec or more. Releasing it will automatically tune to the next available station with a beep sound.

When the () side is pressed longer than 0.5 second and releasing will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the () side is pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing will automatically tune the next lower frequency.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the FM:AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

7. PRESET STATION Select Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. The frequency display will flash after it has been stored into the memory.

You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button.

When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

H2600010-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

4. SCAN Button 1. Playing CD 3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. EJECT Button BASS/TRES SCAN FM/AM CD TUNE DISC 1 2 3 4RPT 5 6 ST DISC RPT TRACK FM12 CH AML 2. FF/REW Button 5. REPEAT Button

H2E0A010

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

B260D03O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during radio operation.
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press the CD button, the CD player will begin playing even if the radio is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW (▶▶ /◀◀)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF (▶▶) or REW (◀◀) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being played can be selected using the track number.
o Press ▶once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press ◀once to skip back to the beginning of the track.

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the desired track.

5. REPEAT Button

To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel, press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button ▲ is pressed with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.

NOTE:

o If the CD does not operate properly or if the ER2 fault code is displayed, use one of two methods to reset the CD deck function.
- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes. Then, reinstall the audio fuse.
- Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery and wait 5 minutes. Then reconnect the negative battery terminal.
o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity.
The preset station frequencies are all erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be set again if this should occur.
Do not add any oil to the rotating parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from the tape mechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.
When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive moisture.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibrations may skip your compact disc.
Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratched and damaged.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause poor disc scratching to occur or damage the compact disc player.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not be operated in recording way of the CD maker. When using the compact disc player, professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

B260E01E-AAT CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If installed)

6. SCAN Button 1. CD Select Button 3. TRACK UP/DOWN BASS/TRES VOL DL FM TUNE DISC SCAN FM/AM CD 1 2 3 4RPT 5 6 ET DISC RPT TRACK FM2 CH AM 5. REPEAT Button 2. DISC Select Button 4. FF/REW Button

H260A010

B280F03FC-GAT

The CD auto changer is located under the front passenger seat.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.
2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD auto changer.
3. Insert the discs into the magazine.
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

1. CD Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs, press the CD button and the CD changer can be used even if the radio is being used. The Hyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs. The disc number will be lit, and the track number, and elapsed time will be displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push ☐ to change the disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being played can be selected using the track number.
o Press ▶ once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press ◀ once to skip back to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW (▶▶/◀◀)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF (▶) or REW (◀◀) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel, press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.

6. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity.
o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD changer as damage to the unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the changer slot as damage to the unit may occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibrations may skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratched and damaged.

Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause poor disc scratching to occur or damage the compact disc changer.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the changer could not be operated in recording way of the CD maker. When using the compact disc changer, professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

WARNING:

Never attempt to change CDs the already inserted in the CD changer magazine while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident that may cause death, serious insury, or property damage.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119

H290A01FC-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

1. POWER ON/OFF VOLUME CONTROL KNOB 8. BEST STATION MEMORY or SCAN Button (If installed) CD/CASSSETTE/FM-AM TUNER RECEIVER CD IN ON VOL ST RPT DISC TRACK MTL CLASSIC OH JAZZ ROCK BSM EQ 7. EQUALIZER Button FM/AM FULL LOGIC CD CHANGER CONTROL TAPE TUNE DISC 1 2 3 4RPT 5 6 BASS TREB BAL-PULL-FAD CD/CDC 5. PRESET Buttons 6. BAND Select Button 4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 3. TREBLE/FAD Konb 2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

H290B03E-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the button to switch the power on. The display shows the radio frequency in the radio mode, the tape direction indicator in the tape mode or CD track in either the CD mode or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the power off, press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out. To increase the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the bass, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control knob

Pull the Bass control knob out further. Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD Knob

TREBLE Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the Treble control knob out further. Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the (∧) side or (∨) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. Press either button and hold down to continuously scroll. Release button once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec or more. Releasing it will automatically tune to the next available station with a beep sound.

When the (∧) side is pressed longer than 0.5 second and releasing will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the (∨) side is pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

5. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. The frequency display will flash after it has been stored into the memory with beep sound. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM station per button.

When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the FM/AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on the display.

7. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the desired tone quality. Each press of the button changes the display as follows;

$$ \begin{array}{c}\text {CLASSIC} \rightarrow \text {JAZZ} \rightarrow \text {ROCK} \rightarrow \text {DEFEAT}\\uparrow\end{array} $$

8. Best Station Memory Button (BSM) (If installed)

When the BSM button is pressed for two seconds or longer, the six channels from the highest field intensity are selected next and stored in memory. The stations selected are stored in the sequence frequency from the first preset key.

SCAN Button (If installed)

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan button again.

CAUTION:

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

122

H290C01FC-GAT CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

4.TAPE EJECT Button CD/CASSETTE/FM/AM TUNER RECEIVER CD IN ON VOL ST RPT DISC ☐ TRACK MTL CLASSIC 888888885 ON JAZZ BOX BSM EQ FM/AM FULL LOGIC 1.000 2.000 3.000 TAPE TUNE DISC 4RPT 5.000 6.000 CD/CDC BASS TREB BAL-PULL-FAD 5.EQUALIZER Button CD CHANGER CONTROL 2.AUTO MUSIC Select Button 1.FF/REW Button 6.DOLBY Button 3.TAPE PROGRAM Button

H290A010

H290D020-GAT

1. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when the FF (▶▶) button is pressed during the PLAY or REW mode.
o Tape play starts when the FF (▶) button is pressed again during the FF mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW (◀◀) button is pressed during the PLAY or FF mode.
o Tape play starts when the REW (◀) button pressed again during the REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of each song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet space between songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC Select button.

o Pressing the ▶button will play the beginning of the next music segment.
o Pressing the ◀ button will start replay at the beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of the tape by merely depressing the program button. An arrow will appear in the display to show tape direction.

4. TAPE EJECT button

o When the ▲button is pressed with the cassette loaded, the cassette is ejected.
o When the ▲ button is pressed during the FF/REW mode, the cassette is ejected.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the desired tone quality. Each press of the button changes the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY, you can reduce this considerably by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If you want to cancel the DOLBY feature, press the button again.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

124

H290E01FC-GAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

6.CD EJECT Button CD/CASSSETTE/FM-AM TUNER RECEIVER CD IN ON VOL ST RPT DISC EX TRACK MTL CLASSIC OH JAZZ 5 ROCK BSM EQ 7.SCAN Button (If installed) 5.EQUALIZER Button FM/AM FULL LOGIC CD CHANGER CONTROL 3.TRACK UP/DOWN TUNE DISC 1 2 3 BASS TREB BAL-PULL-FAD CD/CDC 4.RPT 5 <> 6 >> 4.REPEAT 2.FF/REW Button 1.CD Select Button H290A210

H290F020-GAT

1. CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during radio operation or cassette tape playing.
When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press the CD button the CD player will begin playing even if the radio or cassette player is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW (▶▶/◀◀)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF (▶▶) or REW (◀◀) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being played can be selected using the track number.
o Press ▶▶ button once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press ◀◀ button once to skip back to the beginning of the track.

4. REPEAT

To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel, press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push the button again.

5. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the desired tone quality. Each press of the button changes the display as follows;

$$ \begin{array}{c}\text {CLASSIC} \rightarrow \text {JAZZ} \rightarrow \text {ROCK} \rightarrow \text {DEFEAT}\\uparrow\end{array} $$

6. CD EJECT Button

When the ▲ button is pressed with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.

7. SCAN Button (If Installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:

To assure proper operation of the unit, keep the vehicle interior temperature within a normal range by using the vehicle's air conditioning or heating system.
o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity.
The preset station frequencies are all erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be set again if this should occur.
Do not add any oil to the rotating parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from the tape mechanism and head.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

126

o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.
When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or excessive moisture.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratched and damaged.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause poor disc scratching to occur or damage the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not be operated in recording way of the CD maker. When using the compact disc player, professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

127

H290G02FC-GAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H280) (If Installed)

CD/CASSETTE/FM-AM TUNER RECEIVER CD IN ON VOL ST RPT DISC DD TRACK MTL CLASSIC OH JAZZ S= ROCK BSM EQ 6. SCAN Button (If installed) 7. EQ Button FM/AM FULL LOGIC CO CHANGER CONTROL 3. TRACKUP/DOWN TUNE DISC 1 2 3 BASS TREB BAL-PULL-FAD CD/CDC 4RPT 5 6 5. REPEAT 2.DISC Select Button 4. FF/REW Button 1. CD CHANGER Select Button H290A01

H290A010

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

128

B290H03FC-GAT

The CD auto changer is located under the front passenger seat.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.
2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD auto changer.
3. Insert the discs into the magazine.
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer and close the sliding lid.
   o The CD auto changer can be used when the ignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC" position.

1. CD CHANGER Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs, press the CD/CDC button and the CD changer can be used even if the radio or cassette player is being used. The Hyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs. The disc number will be lit, and the track number, and elapsed time will be displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push [icon] to change the disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being played can be selected using the track number.
o Press ▶▶ once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press ◀◀ once to skip back to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW (▶▶/◀◀)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF (▶▶) or REW (◀◀) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel, press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.

6. SCAN Button (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the desired track.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the desired tone quality. Each press of the button changes the display as follows;

NOTE:

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity.
o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.
When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD changer as damage to the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the changer slot as damage to the unit may occur.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio system, or the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratched and damaged.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. These can cause poor disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc changer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the changer could not be operated in recording way of the CD maker. When using the compact disc changer, professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

WARNING:

Never attempt to change CDs the already inserted in the CD changer magazine while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident that may cause death, serious insury, or property damage.

B050A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

INDICATION	CAUSE	SOLUTION
Er2	CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR(EJECTERROR, LOADING ERROR)	After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Er3	FOCUS ERRORDATA READ ERROR	Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Then insert a normal CD disc.
Er6	DISC ERROR	Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Er8	TAPE DECK ERRORTAPE EJECT ERROR	After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.
HHH	TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH	Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.
no CD	NO DISC IN MAGAZINENO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER	Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

CARE OF DISC

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

131

B850A01F-AAT

Proper Handling

Illustration of two hands holding a CD or DVD disc, one pinning the disc (no text or symbols visible)

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is scratched, it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the disc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or cracked discs. These could severely damage the playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in their individual cases and store them in a cool place away from the sun, heat, and dust.

Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. Do not pull the unit from the dash immediately after a disc is inserted or the eject switch has been pressed. If the unit is pulled out before an operation is completed, the disc will be unstable in the unit and may be damaged.

Do not attempt to insert a disc into the unit when the unit is out of the dash or the power is off.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Illustration of a hand cleaning a circular object with yellow markings (no text or symbols)

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

132

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B280A01A-AAT

Cartoon illustration of two anthropomorphic devices labeled C-120, one pushing the other with a hand (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend the tape life and increase your listening enjoyment. Always protect your tapes and cassette cases from direct sunlight, severe cold and dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes should always be stored in the protective cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot or cold, allow the interior temperature to become more comfortable before listening to your cassettes.

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player when not being played. This could damage the tape player unit and the cassette tape.
We strongly recommend against the use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin and do not perform as well in the automotive environment.

Illustration of a minivan with sun and warning symbols (no text or labels)

o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape surfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as electric motors, speakers or transformers away from your cassette tapes and tape player unit.
o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the open side facing down to prevent dust from setting in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay one given tune or tape section. This can cause poor tape winding to occur, and eventually cause excessive internal drag and poor audio quality in the cassette. If this occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by fast winding the tape from end to end several times. If this does not correct the problem, do not continue to use the tape in your vehicle.

ANTENNA

133

Head Cotton applicator B860A02L

The playback head, capstan and pinch rollers will develop a coating of tape residue that can result in deterioration of sound quality, such as a wavering sound. They should be cleaned monthly using a commercially available head cleaning tape or special solution available from audio specialty shops. Follow the supplier's directions carefully and never oil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound on its reel before inserting in the player. Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind up any slack.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a yellow flag and screwdriver (no text or symbols)

NOTE:

Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning one of the hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label is peeling off, do not put it in the drive mechanism. Do not leave tapes sitting where they are exposed to hot, warm or, high humidity, such as on top of the dashboard or in the player. If a tape is exposed to excessively hot or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before putting it in the player.

0870001FC-GAT Roof Antenna

Side view of a silver car with a yellow tool inserted, showing the hood and seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Illustration of a car trunk with a tool inserted, showing a close-up of the rear window (no text or symbols present)

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

134

This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise.

CAUTION:

• Be sure to remove the antenna before washing the car in an automatic car wash or it may be damaged.
  o Before entering a place with a low height clearance, be sure to adjust the roof antenna low.
  o When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened to ensure proper reception.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE 2-3

KEY POSITIONS 2-4

STARTING 2-5

OPERATING THE MANUAL TRANSAXLE 2-7

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-9

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) 2-13

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 2-18

SMOOTH CORNERING....2-19

WINTER DRIVING 2-20

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING....2-23

CD10A01O-AAT

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A020-GAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other indications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be sure the parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows and lights are clean.
4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors are clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to be sure they are in their proper positions.
6. Lock all the doors.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all other occupants have fastened theirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not needed.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON", check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

WARNING: (DIESEL ENGINE)

To ensure that sufficient vacuum exists within the brake system during cold weather start-up conditions, it is necessary to run the engine at idle for several seconds after starting the engine.

WARNING:

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if installed).

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-GAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

Before starting the engine:

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle, place the shift lever in "P" (park).
To start the engine, insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. Release it as soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:

For safety, the engine will not start if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic Transaxle).

KEY POSITIONS

C040A02A-AAT

WARNING:

The engine should not be turned off or the key removed from the ignition key cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. The steering wheel is locked by removing the key.

LOCK ACC ON START TGH C040401E

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key.

NOTE:

Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON position, the ignition is on and all accessories may be turned on. If the engine is not running, the key should not be left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the battery and may also damage the ignition system.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, the some electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may be operated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in this position. To protect against theft, the steering wheel locks by removing the key.

NOTE:

If difficulty is experienced in turning the ignition key to the START position, turn the steering wheel right and left to release the tension and then turn the key.

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key

ACC LOCK ON START C070C01E

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position.

STARTING

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

5

C050A01A-GAT

Starting for the gasoline engine

COSO A01E

WARNING:

Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your car in or out of the area. The carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless and can cause serious injury or death.

C051A010-GAT

Starting for the diesel engine

ENGINE COLD

o Turn the ignition key to position "ON" and wait for the pre-heat indicator light to go out.
o Operate the starter until the engine runs.

ENGINE WARM

Operate the starter. If the engine does not respond on the first attempt, wait several seconds and try again using the pre-heat.

C050002S-GAT

NORMAL CONDITIONS

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park) position.
3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON" position, make certain all warning lights and gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine.
4. On vehicles equipped with the diesel preheat indicator light, turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. The diesel pre-heat indicator light will first illuminate in amber, and then after a short time, the amber illumination will goes off, indicating that preheating is completed.

AMBER LAMP ON AMBER LAMP OFF C050B01HP

NOTE:

If the engine was not started 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "ON" position, in order to preheat again.

WARNING:

Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed when starting a manual transaxle vehicle. Otherwise there is the potential to cause damage to the vehicle or injury to someone inside or outside the vehicle as a result of the forward or backward movement of the vehicle that will occur if the clutch is not depressed when the vehicle is started.

1. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position and release it when the engine starts.

C055B01B-GAT

STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER INTERCOOLER

(DIESEL ENGINE)

(1) Do not race the engine or sudden accelerate the engine immediately after start it. If the engine is cold, allow the engine to idle for several seconds before it is driven to ensure sufficient lubrication of the turbo charger unit.
(2) After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load, the engine should be allowed to idle about 1 minute before turning it off. This idle time will allow the turbo charger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

WARNING:

Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbo charger unit.

3D diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a conventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

7

NOTE:

To shift into reverse, rest the lever in neutral for at least 3 seconds after your car is completely stopped. Then move the lever into the reverse position.
During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse), put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

CAUTION:

When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red zone. Such over-revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.

C070B02A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be used after fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

0370E00A-GAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

Shift from-to	Recommended
1-2	20 km/h (15 mph)
2-3	40 km/h (25 mph)
3-4	55 km/h (35 mph)
4-5	75 km/h (45 mph)

The shift points as shown above are recommended for optimum fuel economy and performance.

C070D02O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear.
Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your car.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move the shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds, then shift to the reverse position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

9

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. o Never exceed posted speed limits.

C090A01A-GAT

PRND2L C080A01FC

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four forward speeds and one reverse speed. It has a conventional shift pattern as shown in the illustration. At night, with the first position of the multi-function switch, the appropriate symbol on the shift pattern indicator will be illuminated according to the range selected.

CAUTION:

Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving.

NOTE:

→ Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.
→ Push the button when shifting.
→ The selector lever can be shifted freely.

For optimum fuel economy, accelerate gradually. The transaxle will automatically shift to the second, third and overdrive gears.

C090B02A-AAT

The Function of Each Position Is As Follows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parking or while starting the engine. Whenever parking the car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:

Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position.

C030D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral position, which means that no gears are engaged. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position, although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving.

C090E01A-GAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four-gear sequence. Never downshift manually to "2" position or "L" position when vehicle speed is more than 95 km/h (60 mph).

C09DF01A-AAT

o 2 (Second gear):

Use for driving on a slippery road, hill climbing or engine braking downhill. "2" automatically shifts between first and second gears.

This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear is performed. However, the shift-up to third gear is done when the car speed exceeds a certain value to prevent the engine from over-revving. Manually move the selector to "D" returning to normal driving condition.

C090G01S-GAT

o L (Low gear):

Use for driving up a very steep grade or for engine braking when descending steep hills. When downshifting to "L", the transaxle will temporarily remain in second gear until the vehicle has slowed enough for low gear to engage. Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) in low gear.

"L" shifts to 1st gear only. However, shift up to 2nd is performed when the car exceeds a certain speed and, as speed increases, the transaxle will shift up to 3rd gear to prevent over-revving the engine.

C090H01A-GAT

NOTE:

o For smooth and safe operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from "N"(Neutral) position or "P"(Park) position to a forward or "R"(Reverse) gear.
o The brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D", "2", "3"(1.8DOHC), "L" position to "P" position. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage.

C090102A-AAT

CAUTION:

o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when the vehicle has completely stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R", "D", "2", "3"(1.8DOHC) or "L" position.
Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
- Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary.

See the maintenance schedule for the proper fluid recommendation.

C090P01A-GAT

OVERDRIVE SWITCH

Mechanical lever mechanism diagram showing pivot and slider components (no text or symbols)

When the overdrive switch is turned on, the transaxle will automatically upshift to the second, third and overdrive gears. When the overdrive switch is turned off, the transaxle will not upshift to the overdrive gear. For normal driving, the selector lever should be left in the "D" position and the overdrive switch turned on.

If you need to accelerate rapidly, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. The transaxle will automatically shift to a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed and load.

C090N04A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P" or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever into "P" when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into "R"
o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving.
Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep the car from moving.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS will increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:

o A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system (Electronic Stability Program) is functioning properly.
During ABS (ESP) operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the engine compartment while braking. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
Turn the overdrive switch on for good fuel economy and smooth driving. If engine braking is needed in the "D" range or if repeated upshifting and downshifting between 3rd and 4th gear is needed when climbing a gentle slope, it is recommended that the overdrive switch be turned off. Turn the overdrive switch back on immediately afterward.
o Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

WARNING:

ABS (ESP) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system may be longer than for those without it in the following road con-

ditions.

o Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
o Driving with tire chains installed.
o Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

During these conditions, the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds. The safety features of an ABS (ESP) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

BRAKE TRACTION

CONTROL SYSTEM (BTCS)

(If Installed)

On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns at accelerated speeds.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the front wheels.

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves.

CAUTION:

When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, gently release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed.

WARNING:

Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery driving surfaces should be observed.

C300B010-GAT

TCS ON Mode

In the TCS ON mode, the indicator in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated.

NOTE:

1) Turn off the engine. Then restart the engine, and the TCS mode will automatically turn "ON".
2) When the traction control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click is heard from the engine compartment; however, this is only the sound of traction control being checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase.

C300D02O-GAT

Indicator and Warning

The TCS indicator should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON" or "START", but should go out after three seconds.

If the indicator does not illuminate, have it checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the device, TCS illuminates as a warning.

If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine.

Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:

When the TCS indicator illuminates, traction control is automatically deactivated for safety.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

CS10A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

ESP C310A01FC

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering manuevers. ESP checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering

input can all affect whether ESP will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

CAUTION:

Driving with varying tire or wheel size may cause the ESP system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

WARNING:

Electronic stability program is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed.

C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator in the instrument cluster will blink.

If you turn the system off by pressing the ESP switch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on and stay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stability control will be deactivated. Adjust your driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator should go off.

NOTE:

The ESP mode will automatically be turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted.

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A01A-AAT

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after three seconds.

If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP or ESP-OFF indicator does not go out after 3 seconds, have the vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the device while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning.

If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine.

Then, start the engine again to check if the ESP-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:

Nothing should be carried on top of the shelf panel behind the rear seat. If there were an accident or a sudden stop, such objects could move forward and cause damage to the vehicle or injure the occupants.

o After being parked, check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the car is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the car under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your Hyundai dealer for assistance.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

o If your car is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your car creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot on the brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engage the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle).

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

If your car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the car from rolling, block the wheels.

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more kilo- meters from your car if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with

your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.
o Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details).

SMOOTH CORNERING

19

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your Hyundai should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel economy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.
o Remember, your Hyundai does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:

C180B01A-GAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:

Tire chains are not legal in all provinces. Check province laws before fitting tire chains.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Coolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

C180D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in Section 6. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai dealer or a service station.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See Section 9 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Section 6 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

C180G02A-GAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

NOTE:

The proper temperature for using the immobilizer key is from -40^ (-40^) to 80^(176^) . If you heat the immobilizer key over 80^ to open the frozen lock, it may cause damage to the transponder in its head.

C160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Window Washer System

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the finish.

C16001A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

C16DJ01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C170A01A-AAT

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

C180A01A-AAT

USE OF LIGHTS

Check your lights regularly for correct operation and always keep them clean. When driving during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam. This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

23

C190A02A-GAT

If you are considering towing with your car, you should first check with your Province Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements. Since laws vary from province to province, the requirements for towing trailers, cars, other types of vehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:

Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.

C190BD1S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination, making sure that it's location is compatible with that of the trailer or vehicle being towed.

Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes the tongue load uniformly throughout the chassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the car and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C1900MS-GAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.

NOTE:

If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. See "Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-7.

CAUTION:

o Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 6%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently.

C190001A-GAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your car and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously across other lanes of traffic and ultimately collide with another vehicle. To eliminate this potentially dangerous situation, safety chains, attached between your car and the trailer or towed vehicle, are required in most provinces.

C193E01FC-GAT

Trailer Weight Limit

TONGUE LOAD TOTAL TRAILER WEIGHT C190E01L

Tongue loads can be increased or decreased by redistributing the load in the trailer. This can be verified by checking the total weight of the loaded trailer and then checking the load on the tongue.

NOTE:

1. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half on the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear.

GROSS AXLE WEIGHT GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT C190CD2L

1. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle, driver, all passengers and their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and other optional equipment.
2. The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). It is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.
   Improper trailer loading and/or too

much luggage in the trunk can overload the rear axle. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again.

1. The maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device; 52kg
2. The maximum permissible over-

COUPLING POINT C190E01FC

hang of the coupling point : 760 mm

CAUTION:

The following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded trailer weigh cannot safely exceed the values in the following chart.

WARNING:
kg (Lbs)

			Maximum Towable Weight
			Trailer	Tongue
With Brake Type	1.5 Diesel 1.6/1.8 L	MANUAL TRANSAXLE	1,300 (2,865)	52 (115)
	1.6/1.8 L	AUTO TRANSAXLE	1,100 (2,424)
Without Brake Type			550 (1,212)

I properly loading your car and trailer can seriously affect its steering and braking performance causing a crash in which could cause serious injury or death.

C190F02A-GAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights, brake lights, and turn signals.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (Less than 100 km/h)
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions.
4. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic transaxle).
5. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
6. Check the condition and air pressure of all tires on the trailer and your vehicle. Low tire pressure can seriously affect the handling. Also check the spare tire.
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

26

1. When parking your vehicle and trailer, especially on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Turn your front wheel into the curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
2. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
3. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
4. Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or sudden stops.
5. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.

6. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

7. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect.

When ascending a long grade, downshift the transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating.

1. If you have to stop while going uphill, do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. This can cause the automatic transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake or footbrake.

NOTE:

When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently.

CAUTION:

If overheating should occur when towing, (temperature gauge reads near the red zone), taking the following actions may reduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.
2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.
4. While in stop and go traffic, place the gear selection in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

If the Engine Will not Start 3-2

Jump Starting 3-3

If the Engine Overheats 3-4

Spare Tire 3-6

If You Have a Flat Tire 3-7

Changing A Flat Tire 3-7

If Your vehicle Must Be Towed 3-12

Emergency Towing 3-14

If You Lose Your Keys....3-15

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

D010AD1A-AATDD010B02A-AAT

WARNING:

If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the car to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard.

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P" and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump Starting".

D010C02A-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start

Technical illustration of an engine cylinder assembly (no text or symbols visible)

1. Check fuel level.
2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all connectors at ignition coils and spark plugs(For Gasoline Engine) or check all connectors at glow plug and glow plug relay(For Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine room.
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

JUMP STARTING

3

DD10DD1A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

D020A03A-AAT

Discharged battery Booster battery 12V HFC4002

WARNING:

The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

If you should accidentally get acid on your skin or in your eyes, immediately remove any contaminated clothing and flush the area with clean water for at least 15 minutes. Then promptly obtain medical attention. If you must be transported to an emergency facility, continue to apply water to the affected area with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you cannot determine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt to use it for the jump start.
To jump start a car with a discharged battery, follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

4

1. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the exact location shown. First, attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the discharged battery. Then attach the other end of the same cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster battery. Next, using the other cable, attach one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable of the booster battery. Then attach the other end of that cable to a solid metal part of the engine away from the battery. Do not connect the cable to any moving part.
2. Start the engine in the car with the booster battery and let it run for a few minutes. This will help to assure that the booster battery is fully charged. During the jumping operation, run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm.

3. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery using the normal starting procedure. After the engine starts, leave the jumper cables connected and let the engine run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for several minutes.

4. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery became discharged (because the lights were left on, etc.), have the charging system checked by your Hyundai dealer.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens to you, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the engine coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory,

check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

room while engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

1. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands, and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

1. If the water pump drive belt is broken or coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai dealer for assistance.

CAUTION:

Serious loss of engine coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai dealer.

WARNING (Diesel only): work on Injection system with running or within 30 sec after shutting off engine. High re pump, rail, injectors and pressure pipes are subject to pressure even after the engine d. The fuel jet produced by aks may cause serious in-It touch the body. People pacemakers should not move 0cm closer to the ECU or harness within the engine

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

1. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if the engine coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir (page 6-14) to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

SPARE TIRE

D040A01FC-GAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the temporary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon as possible after installing the spare tire, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tire pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

Tire Size	T115/70R(D)15
Inflation Pressure	420 kPa (60 psi)

1. The spare tire should only be used temporarily and should be returned to the luggage compartment as soon as the original tire can be repaired or replaced.
2. Continuous use at speeds of over 80 km/h (50 mph) is not recommended.

3. As the temporary spare tire is specifically designed for your car, it should not be used on any other vehicle.

4. The temporary spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the temporary spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.

5. The temporary spare tire pressure should be checked once a month while the tire is stored.

CAUTION:

o Do not use snow chains with your temporary spare tire.
o Do not use more than one temporary spare tire at a time.

D040B01FC-GAT

FULL SIZE SPARE TIRE (If Installed)

The following instructions for the FULL SIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon as practical after installing the spare tire, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tire pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

Tire Size	Full Size
Inflation Pressure	210 kPa (30 psi)

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

7

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Mechanical component diagram showing a dial indicator and mechanical parts (no text or symbols)

Remove the installation bolt to remove the spare tire. To replace the spare tire in its storage compartment, tighten the bolt firmly with your fingers until there is no more play in the spare tire.

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in "P" (automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic.
4. Change the tire following the instructions provided on the following pages.

D06DA01A-AAT

Side view of a car's wheel and side panel, showing tire and dashboard (no text or symbols)

The procedure described on the following pages can be used to rotate tires as well as to change a flat tire. When preparing to change a flat tire, check to be sure the gear selector lever is in "P" (automatic transaxle) or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and that the parking brake is set, then:

D080K01FC-GAT

Wheel Cap (If installed)

Groove HFC4023

1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screw driver to avoid scratching.
2. Insert the screw driver into the groove of the wheel cap and pry gently to remove the wheel cap.
3. Change the flat tire.

Groove Boss HF-C4024

1. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the boss of the wheel cap in the groove of the wheel, hitting the center of the wheel cap with your hand.

D080B01FC-GAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool
   

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a valve and gear (no text or symbols)

Remove the spare tire and take out the jack and tool bag from the luggage room.

NOTE:

The jack is located beneath the luggage mat in the vehicle.

DD80CD1A-AAT

1. Block the Wheel
   

Flat tire D080029C

Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when the vehicle is raised on the jack.

DD60D01A-AAT

1. Loosen Wheel Nuts
   

Side view of a car tire mounted on a surface, showing tire tread and wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. To loosen the nuts, turn the wheel nut wrench handle counterclockwise. When doing this, be sure that the socket is seated completely over the nut so it cannot slip off. For maximum leverage, position the wrench so the handle is to the right as shown in the drawing. Then, while holding the wrench near the end of the handle, pull up on it with steady pressure. Do not remove the nuts at this time. Just loosen them about one-half turn.

D06DE01A-AAT

1. Put the Jack in Place
   

Illustration of a silver minivan with two side-view diagrams showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

The base of the jack should be placed on firm, level ground. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing.

D080F02E-AAT

1. Raising the Vehicle
   

Wrench bar Wheel nut wrench HFC4022

After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick, flat stone or other object under the base of the jack to keep it from sinking.

Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare tire can be installed. To do this, you will need more ground clearance than is required to remove the flat tire.

WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! This is very dangerous as the vehicle could fall and cause serious injury or death. No one should stay in the car while the jack is being used.

D060GD1Y-AAT

1. Changing Wheels
   

Close-up of a car wheel and tire assembly (no visible text or symbols)

Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

Illustration of a car tire being cleaned with a tool, showing mechanical components and wheel (no text or symbols)

wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.

D060101E-GAT

1. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

WARNING:

Wheel and wheel covers may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury.

Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could loosen and cause the loss of a

DO60H02A-AAT

1. Re-Install Wheel Nuts

Side view of a car with visible tire and angle marker (no text or symbols)

To reinstall the wheel cover, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. The nuts should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

Side view of a car tire mounted on a surface, showing tire alignment and wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have a technician tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

12

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 900-1,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft)

D060J01FC-GAT

After Changing Wheels

Side view of a car with a tire and hand adjusting the wheel (no visible text or symbols)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,

air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place in the luggage room and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE TOWED

D000AD10-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service. This will help assure that your vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. In any case, rather than risk damage to your car, it is suggested that you show this information to the tow truck operator. Be sure that a safety chain system is used and that all local laws are observed. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.

CAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed incorrectly!
o Be sure the transaxie is in neutral.
When the engine will not start, be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position.

D0B0B01O-GAT Towing the Vehicle

HFC006
Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

CAUTION: o When towing the vehicle, take care not to cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. Do not tow with sling type truck as this may cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the ve- hicle.

NOTE:

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, be sure the parking brake is released.
Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.
2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
o Manual Transaxle:

If you do not use a towing dolly, place the ignition key in the "ACC" position and put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".

CAUTION:

Do not tow with the key removed or in the "LOCK" position when towing from the rear without a towing dolly.

14

EMERGENCY TOWING

o Automatic Transaxle: Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

CAUTION:

Illustration of a truck and two cars with a yellow prohibition symbol above (no text or labels)

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with all the wheels off the ground.

D060D04A-AAT

Front Rear D080D04FC

For emergency towing when no commercial tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under the front/rear of your vehicle. Do not attempt to tow your vehicle in this manner on any unpaved surface. This could result in serious damage to your vehicle.

Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels, drive train, axles, steering or brakes are damaged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine running). A driver must be in the towed vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:

Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

CAUTION:

If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Do not tow at speeds greater than 50 km/h (30 mph) and for more than 25 km (15 miles).

Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY?

D120A01A-GAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealers can make you a new key if you have your key number. If you lock the keys inside your vehicle and you cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealers can use special tools to open the door for you.

Information about the key of immobilizer system (if installed) will be found on page 1-5.

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Protection 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion.... 4-3

Washing and Waxing 4-4

Cleaning the Interior 4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

CORROSION PROTECTION

2

ED10A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality, however, this is only part of the job. To achieve long-term corrosion resistance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

ED10B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

E010001A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from starting by observing the following:

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.

If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than wash-

ing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

E020D01A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting causing corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

WASHING AND WAXING

E000A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hot from being in the sun. Always wash your car in the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and trim through chemical action if pollutants are allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If you live near the ocean or in an area where road salts or dust control chemicals are used, you should pay particular attention to the underside of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven through mud or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard direct stream of water to remove accumulated mud or corrosive materials. Use a good quality car-washing solution and follow the manufacturer's directions on the package. These are available at your Hyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household detergents, gasoline, strong sol vents or abrasive cleaning powders as these may damage the finish.

Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently and remove them a little at a time.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or soapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because aluminum is subject to corrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloy wheels special attention in winter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the wheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will result.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low, you may find it necessary to rinse each section immediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying the car is to remove water from the car so it will dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint, use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai (at least once a month). Give special attention to the removal of salt, mud and other substances on the underside of the splashboards of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the underside of the doors are open. Paint damage can be caused by small accumulation of tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and bird droppings, when not removed immediately. If water alone is not strong enough to remove the accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solution.

Be sure to rinse the surface after washing to remove the solution. Never allow the solution to dry on the painted surfaces.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corrosive cleaning agents. These can damage the finish of the car. To remove road tar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth or commercially available bug and tar remover. Be gentle. To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishing or waxing or using a combination cleaner and wax. Use a good quality commercial product and follow the manufacturer's directions on the container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces as well as the paint.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again when water no longer beads on a clean surface but spreads out over a larger area.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to preserve the appearance of the bumpers on your Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you do, wash it off immediately with clear water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper surfaces. They are made of soft plastic and the surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution.
Do not expose the bumpers to high temperatures. For example, if you have your car repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the car if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild soap or detergent and water using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stains are not removed, repeat this procedure until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other strong cleaners.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6

ED40B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery (If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholstered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it may work into the surface of the leather, causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly with soap and water will keep your leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many years of wear.

Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild soap and lukewarm water, work up a good lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils are incorporated through processing that none need be applied during the life of the leather. Oil applied to the finished surface will in no way help the leather and may do more harm than good. Varnishes and furniture polishes should never be used under any conditions.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid form or powder. Read the instructions and follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner with the appropriate attachment, remove as much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply the foam following the manufacturer's directions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add water. These cleaners work best when the carpet is kept as dry as possible.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the seat belts as this may weaken the fabric.

While cleaning the belts, inspect them for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of damage and replace them if necessary.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner on the windows. However, when cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to damage the rear window defroster wiring.

E050A01A-AAT

Any Questions?

If you have any questions about the care of your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Intervals 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance 5-4

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions .... 5-7

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items 5-8

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010A01A-GAT

Service Requirements

To assure that you receive the greatest number of kilometers of satisfying operation from your Hyundai, certain maintenance procedures must be performed. Although careful design and engineering have reduced these to a minimum, those that are required are of the utmost importance.

It is your responsibility to have these maintenance procedures performed to comply with the terms of the warranties covering your new Hyundai. The Service Passport supplied with your new vehicle provides further information about these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundai can be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedures

o General checks

o Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010C01A-GAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections, adjustments and replacements that are listed in the maintenance charts starting on page 5-4. These procedures must be performed at the intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to assure that your warranty remains in effect. Although it is strongly recommended that they be performed by the factory-trained or distributor-trained technicians at your Hyundai dealer, these procedures may be performed at any qualified service facility.

It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service parts be used for any required repairs or replacements. Other parts of equivalent quality such as engine oil, engine coolant, manual or auto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on which are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or its distributor may be used without affecting your warranty coverage but you should always be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the original Hyundai parts. Your Service Passport provides further information about your warranty coverage.

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should perform when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list of these items will be found on page 6-5.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few tools that are required and want to take the time to do so, you can inspect and service a number of items. For more information about doing it yourself, see Section 6.

F010F01A-GAT

A Few Tips

Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced, keep copies of the service records in your glovebox. This will help assure you can document the required procedures being performed to keep your warranties in effect. This is especially important when service is not performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

F020A0GS-GAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Inspection should be performed any time a malfunction is experienced or suspected. Receipts for all emission control system services should be retained to demonstrate compliance with conditions of the emissions system warranty.

For severe usage maintenance requirements, see page 5-7 of this section.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

FOODA01A-GAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both Kilmeters and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

F030B02FC-GAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace of necessary.

NO.	DESCRIPTION	KILOMETERS X 1000	15	30	45	60	75	90	105	120
		MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72	84	96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE)
1	ENGINE OIL & FILTER		R	R	R	R	R	R	R	R
2	DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON)			I		I		I		I
3	FUEL FILTER (MFI)					R				R
4	FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES & CONNECTIONS		I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
5	TIMING BELT					I		R
6	VAPOR HOSE & FUEL FILLER CAP			I		I		I		I
7	VACUUM CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES			I		I		I		I
8	AIR CLEANER FILTER		I	I	R	I	I	R	I	I
9	SPARK PLUGS			I	R		I	R		I
10	VALVE CLEARANCE (1.8 DOHC)		See Note (1)

Note : (1) FOR EVERY 90,000KM OR 48 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST: "I"

F030D02FC-GAT

R :Replace

I: Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

NO.	DESCRIPTION		KILOMETERS X 1000	15	30	45	60	75	90	105	120
			MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72	84	96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL)
1	ENGINE OIL & FILTER (API Class : CH-4 or ABOVE)See Note(1) (ACEA Class : B-4 or ABOVE)		European Community Only	R	R	R	R	R	R	R	R
			Except European Community See Note (2)
2	AIR CLEANER FILTER			I	R	I	R	I	R	I	R
3	FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGESee Note (3)	European Community Only			R		R		R		R
		Except European Community		See Note (4)
4	TIMING BELT										R
5	DRIVE BELT (FOR P/STR'G PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON)				I		I		R		I
6	ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
7	ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE & VACUUM HOSE			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
8	FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I

Note :(1) EVERY 500 KM OR BEFORE STARTING A LONG TRIP - "I"

(2) EVERY 10,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS. WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"
(3) IF THE DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS DON'T MEET THE EUROPEAN STANDARDS EN590, REPLACE IT MORE FREQUENTLY. CONSULT AN AUTHORIZED HYUNDAI DEALER FOR DETAILS.
(4) INSPECT EVERY 7,500KM OR 6 MONTHS AND REPLACE EVERY 15,000KM OR 12 MONTHS. WHEN REPLACING THE FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE, USE HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6

F030C02FC-GAT

R : Replace

I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

NO.	DESCRIPTION		KILOMETERS X 1000	15	30	45	60	75	90	105	120
			MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72	84	96
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1	COOLING SYSTEM			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
2	COOLANT	European Community Only		See Note (1)
		Except European Community		See Note (2)
3	MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
4	AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID	European Community Only		I	I	I	I	I	R	I	I
		Except European Community		I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
5	BRAKE HOSES AND LINES			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
6	BRAKE FLUID				I		I		I		I
7	REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE				I		I		I		I
8	BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
9	EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
10	SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
11	STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
12	POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
13	DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS				I		I		I		I
14	AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT			I	I	I	I	I	I	I	I
15	AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)			R	R	R	R	R	R	R	R

Note : (1) FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 90,000 KM OR 60 MONTHS.
AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 45,000 KM OR 24 MONTHS.
(2) FOR EVERY 45,000 KM OR 24 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST: "R"

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

7

F040A02FC-GAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM		MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE AND FILTER (GASOLINE)		R	EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS	A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (DIESEL)	European Community Only	R	EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS	A, B, C, F, H, I, J
	Except European Community		EVERY 5,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, E
SPARK PLUGS		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	B, H
TIMING BELT		R	EVERY 60,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS	D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKE		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR RACK, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, E, F, G
DRIVESHAFTS & BOOTS		I	EVERY 15,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS	C, D, E, G
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL		R	EVERY 100,000 KM	A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID	European Community Only	R	EVERY 45,000 KM	A, C, E, F, G, H, I
	Except European Community		EVERY 40,000 KM
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 8km(5miles) in normal
tempera ture or less than 16km(10miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C(90°F)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 170 Km/h(100 MPH)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F080M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by trained technicians.

F060D01TB-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

WARNING (Diesel only): Never work on injection system with engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touch the body. People using pacemakers should not move than 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

F080E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

F080H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

FOBONO2E-GAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.

F07DB01A-GAT

o Cooling System

Check the cooling system part, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

10

F070C01A-AAT

o Engine Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

F070001A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:

If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range of the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may result in damage to the ATM.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

F07DG02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and

Linings, Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F07DP01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

F070001A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine Compartment 6-2

General Checks 6-5

Checking the Engine Oil 6-6

Changing the Oil and Filter 6-9

Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ....6-12

Changing the Air Cleaner Filter 6-15

Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) 6-18

Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) ......6-19

Checking the Brakes 6-21

Checking the Clutch Fluid 6-23

Air Conditioning Care 6-24

Changing the Climate Control Air Filter (In Front of Blower Unit) 6-25

Checking Drive Belts 6-27

Checking and Replacing Fuses 6-26

Checking The Battery 6-30

Checking The Eclectric Cooling Fans 6-32

Power Steering Fluid Level 6-32

Bleeding the Fuel System 6-33

Removal of Water From The Fuel Filter 6-34

Headlight Aiming Adjustment 6-35

Replacing Headlight Bulbs 6-36

Bulb Wattage 6-38

Fuse Panel Description 6-39

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01FC-GAT

Gasoline Engine (1.6 DOHC)

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

CAUTION:

When Inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

HFC5001

1. Air filter element
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir

4. Auto fuel cut switch

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Engine cover
9. Engine coolant reservoir

10.Radiator cap
11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (If installed)
12.Battery
13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

G010C01FC-GAT

Gasoline Engine(1.8 DOHC)

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

HFC003

1. Air filter element
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir

4. Auto fuel cut switch

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Engine cover

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Radiator cap

11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (If installed)
    12.Battery
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4

G010E02FC-GAT

Diesel Engine (1.5 CRDI)

1 2 3 4 5 CRO-16Y 6 7 8 9 10 11

CAUTION:

When Inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

G010E02FC

1. Air filter element
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir

4. Fuel filter

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil level dipstick

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Radiator cap
   10.Battery

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

GENERAL CHECKS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6

5

G020A02A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and condition
o Transaxle fluid level and condition
o Brake fluid level
o Clutch fluid level
o Engine coolant level
o Windshield washer fluid level
o Accessory drive belt condition
o Engine coolant hose condition
o Fluid leaks
(on or below components)
o Power steering fluid level
o Battery condition
o Air filter condition

G02CB01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and condition
o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque
o Exhaust system condition
o Light condition and operation
o Windshield glass condition
o Wiper blade condition
o Paint condition and body corrosion
o Fluid leaks
o Door and hood lock condition
o Tire pressure and condition
(including spare tire)

G020C01A-AA1

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each time when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operation
o Windshield wiper operation
o Horn operation

o Defroster, heating system operation (and air conditioning, if installed)
o Steering operation and condition
o Mirror condition and operation
o Turn signal operation
o Accelerator pedal operation
o Brake operation, including parking brake
o Manual transaxle operation, including clutch operation
o Automatic transaxle operation, including "PARK" mechanism operation
o Seat control condition and operation
o Seat belt condition and operation
o Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operate correctly or appears to be functioning incorrectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistance from your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G000A020-GAT

Recommended Oil Gasoline Engine

Engine oil is essential to the performance and service of the engine. It is suggested that you check the oil level at least once a week in normal use and more often if you are on a trip or driving in severe conditions.

The engine oil quality should meet the following classification:

API SJ, SL or ABOVE, ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

NOTE:

o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred regardless of regional option and engine variation.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is not available, secondary recommended engine oil for corresponding temperature range can be used.

HYUNDAI RECOMMENDS Shell HELIX Motor oils

G030B03FC-GAT

Recommended Oil Diesel Engine

Engine oil is essential to the performance and service of the engine. It is suggested that you check the oil level every 500km or before starting a long trip and more often if you are driving in severe conditions.

The engine oil quality should meet the following classification:

API class: CH-4 or ABOVE ACEA class: B4 or ABOVE

NOTE:

SAE 0W-30 oil is for extra cold zone and to be restricted by driving condition and dealing area. (Especially, not recommended for sustained high loaded and high speed operation.)

G030C02JM-GAT

To Check the Oil Level

Gasoline engine L F HFC8007

Diesel engine F L G030C02F4

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to normal operating temperature and be sure your vehicle is parked on level ground. Turn the engine off.

Wait about five minutes, then remove the dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw it again. Then note the highest level the oil has reached on the dipstick. It should be between the upper "F" and lower "L" range.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8

G030D03A-GAT

Adding Oil

Gasoline engine

Gasoline engine HFC5009

Diesel engine

Close-up of a diesel engine with a hand pouring liquid into the engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is equal to about 1 liter(Gasoline Engine)/1.2 liter(Diesel Engine) of oil.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil using by a funnel. Do not overfill not to damage engine.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

G350A01A-GAT

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Function of Engine Oil

Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine.

Engine oil consumption

It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil while normal driving. The cause of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows;

o Engine oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.

A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated during engine operation sucks some of the oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil with some oil of the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

9

The engine oil consumption is strongly effected by the viscosity and quality of oil, engine rpm and driving condition etc. The engine oil is more consumed under severe driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration than normal driving condition.

G040A04FC-GAT Gasoline engine

1.6 DOHC Oil filler cap Oil filter Drain plug F040A021B

1.8 DOHC Oil filter cap Oil filter Drain plug GA40A35E

The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle).
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the oil pan drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you!

1. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new gasket and retighten by turning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque :
kgf.m

1.6 DOHC	E.C	4.0 ~ 4.5
	Except E.C	3.5 ~ 4.5
1.8 DOHC	4.0 ~ 4.5

1. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper size. A certain amount of oil will come out when you remove the filter. So be sure to have your drain pan in place underneath it.

2. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the instructions on the carton or on the filter itself. Do not over-tighten.

Oil filter tightening torque: 1.2\~1.6kgf.m

Be sure that the mounting surface on the engine is clean and that the old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate the new gasket on the filter with clean engine oil before installation.

1. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.
2. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Do not overfill not to damage engine.

1. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
   10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:

Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for maybe reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it in with the household trash.

WARNING:

Used motor oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Wash your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

G040B04FC-GAT Diesel Engine

Oil filler cap Oil filter 0040001FC

The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark.

Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle).

1. Open the hood and remove the engine oil level dipstick.

Upper cap O-ring Oil filter element Centerpipe O-ring Oil filter housing G040B02FC

1. Loosen the oil filter upper cap with a proper tool from the oil filter housing until an O-ring is seen. Then, drain the oil completely.

CAUTION:

Slowly loosen the oil filter upper cap not to overflow the oil.

1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Slide underneath the car and loosen the oil pan drain plug by turning it counterclockwise oil pan with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you!

1. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new gasket and retighten by turning it clockwise.
   Oil pan drain plug tightening torque : 3.5 \~ 4.5 kgf.m
2. Pull out the oil filter upper cap with element from the oil filter housing. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt or oil accumulated around the oil filter housing.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

12

1. After mounting a new centerpipe O-ring, new oil filter element and new O-ring to upper cap, install the upper cap to oil filter housing and retighten by turning it clockwise. Do not over-tighten.

Tightening torque : 2.5 kgf.m

CAUTION:

Don't use old oil filter upper cap O-ring and centerpipe O-ring

1. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil by into a funnel. Do not overfill not to damage the engine.

1. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
2. Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:

o It is recommended that the engine oil and filter should be changed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for maybe reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it into the household trash.

WARNING:

Used motor oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Wash your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

CHECKING AND CHANGING THE ENGINE COOLANT

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the engine coolant is under pressure and may erupt through the opening if the cap is removed. You could be seriously burned if you do not observe this precaution. Do not remove the radiator cap until the radiator is cool to the touch.

G050G01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Diagram of a gasoline engine assembly showing internal components and wiring (no text or labels)

Diesel engine C05D602FC

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a 50/50 mix with water.

The engine coolant should be compatible with aluminum engine parts. Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should not be used. The cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and corrosion. Never allow the concentration of antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system may result. For proper concentration when adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to the following table.

Ambient temperature °C (°F)	Engine coolant concentration
	Antifreeze solution	Water
-15 (5)	35%	65%
-25 (-13)	40%	60%
-35 (-31)	50%	50%
-45 (-49)	60%	40%

G050C01A-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

3D rendering of a gasoline engine component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

3D rendering of a diesel engine component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The coolant level can be seen on the side of the plastic coolant reservoir.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

14

The level of the coolant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the level is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to bring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low, inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid level frequently. If the level drops again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and diagnosis of the reason.

G05000QA-AAT

To Change the Coolant

The coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:

Engine coolant can damage the finish of your car. If you spill engine coolant on the car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the parking brake and remove the radiator cap when cool.
2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place. Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all the engine coolant to drain from the cooling system, then securely close the drain cock.
3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the cooling system in your car. Then, following the manufacturer's directions on the engine coolant container, add the appropriate quantity of coolant to the radiator.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve with yellow directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

C050C01FC

1. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down on it, until it stops. This relieves any pressure remaining in the cooling system. And remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized or distilled water. Continue to add clean demineralized or distilled water in small quantities until the fluid level stays up in the radiator neck.

WARNING:

Remove the radiator cap when the radiator is cool.

CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER

15

Illustration of a hand operating a mechanical device with hoses and components (no visible text or symbols)

G0G0D02FC

1. Start the engine, top off the radiator with water and then add engine coolant to the reservoir until the level is between "L" and "F".
2. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and check to be sure the drain cocks are fully closed and not leaking.

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

G070A01E-AAT

Gasoline engine

Close-up of a mechanical engine component with visible springs and shafts (no text or symbols)

Diesel engine

Close-up of a diesel engine component with visible hoses and wiring (no text or symbols)

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the cover.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16

When this is done, the cover can be lifted off, the old filter removed and the new filter put in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement Parts are recommended.

CAUTION:

o Operating your vehicle without a proper air filter in place can result in excessive engine wear.
When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner filter.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G002A02A-AAT

Diagram of a vehicle under lane markings with a magnified inset showing a curved track (no text or symbols present)

The wiper blades should be carefully inspected from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. To clean the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water. If the wipers continue to streak or smear the glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai replacement parts or their equivalent.

CAUTION:

Do not operate the wipers on dry glass. This can result in more rapid wear of the wiper blades and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

G090B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper to the vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

Close-up of a mechanical component with yellow arrows indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

1. Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm.

Diagram of a mechanical linkage or cable assembly with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

1. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it.

To install the wiper blade

Diagram of a mechanical linkage or cable assembly with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lower the wiper blade at the level of the wiper arm as shown in the drawing.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an audible "click" to engage in the end of the wiper arm.

NOTE:

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

18

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G030A02A-GAT

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a cylindrical component with attached pipes and a valve (no text or symbols visible)

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the windshield washer system.

A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be checked more frequently during inclement weather or whenever the washer system is in more frequent use.

The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.0 liters (3.2 U.S. quarts).

CAUTION:

o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant) should not be used in the washer system because it will damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be operated if the washer reservoir is empty. This can damage the washer fluid pump.

WARNING:

o Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks of flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or its occupants could occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL

G100A02FC-GAT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

Filler plug Drain plug G100A01A

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.15 liters (2.3 U.S. quarts) (2.0 liters, (2.11 U.S. quarts) -1.5 CRDi).

WARNING:

It is always better to check the transaxle oil level when the engine is cool or cold. If the engine is hot, you should exercise great caution to avoid burning yourself on hot engine or exhaust parts.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the manual transaxle fluid should be checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

G110A02E-AAT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:

Automatic transaxle fluid is a red in color. As driving distance increases, the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace based upon the changing color.

You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in section 5.

G110B04A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hundai Motor Co., Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:

Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause damage to the automatic transaxle. Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., If you are having your vehicle serviced at a facility other than a Hyundai dealer, verify that the correct ATF is used for your vehicle.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

20

G110C01FC-GAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is 6.1 liters (1.6 DOHC)/6.7 liters (1.8 DOHC).

WARNING:

The transaxle fluid level should be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This means that the engine, radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot. Exercise great care not to burn yourself during this procedure.

G110D03A-GAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

PRND2L C090W01FC

Park the car on level ground with the parking brake engaged. When the transaxle fluid level is checked, the transaxle fluid should be at normal operating temperature and the engine idling.

Mechanical diagram showing a lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes and move the gear selector lever from "P" to each of its other positions -- "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" -- and then return to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands, long hair and clothing clear of any moving parts.
2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, then remove it again. Now check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" range on the dipstick.

CHECKING THE BRAKES

Fluid level should be within this range

C030A03FC

1. If the transaxle fluid level is low use a funnel to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range. Do not overfill.

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

WARNING (Diesel only):

Never work on injection system with engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touch the body. People using pacemakers should not move than 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:

Because brakes are essential to the safe operation of the car, it is suggested that they be checked and inspected by your Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be checked and inspected for wear at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

22

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking system. Follow the instructions printed on the container.

G120001A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

Gasoline engine MAX MIN HFC5005

Diesel engine MAX MIN G12002PC

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically.

The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill.

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

23

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:

Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can or reservoir to remain open any longer than required. This will prevent entry of dirt and moisture which can damage the brake system and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reservoir and tighten.

G130AD1S-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

Gasoline engine MAX MIN HFC5005

Diesel engine MAX MIN G12002PC

The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other under hood services.

The system should be checked for leakage at the same time. Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be inspected and repaired immediately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:

Do not allow any other liquids to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It can damage your vision if you get it in your eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.

G140AD1A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engine radiator) should be checked periodically for accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc. These can interfere with maximum cooling efficiency. When removing such accumulations, brush or hose them away carefully to avoid bending the cooling fans.

G14CB01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Operation

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for several minutes with the air conditioning set at the maximum cold setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold, have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:

Running the air conditioning system for extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor.

G140CD1A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the system, the air conditioning should be run for at least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly important during cool weather when the air conditioning system is not otherwise in use.

CHANGING THE CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

G140D01S-GAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

A/C 8mm (0.315 in.) TENSION PULLEY CRANK PULLEY G14D001A

When the air conditioning is being used regularly, the compressor drive belt tension should be checked at least once a month.

To check the drive belt tension, press down on the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt anymore than 8.0 mm. If you have the instruments to check it with a force of 98N (22 lb.), the deflection should be approx. 8.0 mm (0.315 in.). If the belt is too loose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

B140E02FC-AAT

(In Front of Blower Unit)

The climate control air filter is located in front of the blower unit behind the glove box.

It helps to decrease pollutants from entering the car.

Close-up of a car interior showing a knife inserted into the nose area, with an inset close-up highlighting the tool (no text or symbols visible)

1. Open the glove box and remove the adjusting pins on both sides of the glove box.

Interior view of a vehicle air duct system with two yellow warning indicators (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the filter cover by pulling upward the hooks of the filter cover.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26

CHECKING THE FREEPLAY

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit showing airflow direction and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

1. Replace the air conditioner filter with a new one.
2. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:

Be sure to install the air conditioner filter in the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise, it may cause noise or deterioration.

G150A01A-GAT

Steering wheel

30 mm (1.18 in.) G150A21FC

To check the steering wheel freeplay, stop the car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and gently move the steering wheel back and forth. Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive to changes in resistance that mark the limits of the freeplay. If the freeplay is greater than specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G160A01A-GAT

Clutch pedal

6 ~ 13 mm (0.24 ~ 0.51 in.) G180AD1E

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutch pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This is the clutch pedal freeplay. The freeplay should be within the limits specified in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G170A01A-GAT

Brake pedal

3 ~ 8 mm (0.12 ~ 0.31 in.) HXCS505

With the engine off, press down on the brake pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the brake booster. Then, using your hand, press down slowly on the brake pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This is the brake pedal freeplay. The freeplay should be within the limits specified in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G1B0A01A-GAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CLEARANCE

45.1 mm (1.78 in.) G180A01L

You need a helper to check the brake pedal clearance. With the engine running, have your helper press down on the brake pedal several times and then hold it down with a force of about 490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat. If the brake pedal clearance is not within the limits specified in the illustration, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G190A01A-GAT

Gasoline Engine

Water Pump Pulley 5~6 mm (0.2~0.24 in.) Alternator Pulley Crankshaft Pulley HTB186

Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the same time, belts should be examined for cracks, wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary.

Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced, the new belt should be adjusted again after two or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from initial stretching after use.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

28

G190B01TB-GAT

Diesel Engine

Auto tentioner fully Alternator Power steering pump A/C comp. G190B01A

At the scheduled maintenance inspection, belts should be examined for cracks, wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary.

Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine.

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

G200AD1A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

GoodBad G201A017C

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from the battery are ever overloaded, thus preventing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This could be caused by a short in the system drawing too much current.) If this ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause, repair the system and replace the fusible link. The fusible links are located in a fuse box for easy inspection.

CAUTION:

When replacing a fusible link, never use anything but a new fusible link with the same or lower amperage rating. Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. This could result in serious damage and create a fire hazard.

G200B01E-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuses

Interior view of a vehicle showing a digital display unit mounted on a vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

The fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be found in the backside of the multi box located on the instrument panel to the left side of the driver.

On the backside of the mult box, you will find a list showing the circuits protected by each fuse.

If any of your car's lights or other electrical accessories stop working, a blown fuse could be the reason. If the fuse has burned out, you will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has burned through. If you suspect a blown fuse, follow this procedure:

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.
2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse. Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you (a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the fuse box to simplify this operation).
3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you find one that appears to have burned out.

Close-up of hands installing or adjusting a circuit board component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer. If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower rating from an accessory you can temporarily get along without (the radio or cigarette lighter, for example). Always remember to replace the borrowed fuse.

Good

Burned out

C20CE05Y

CAUTION:

A burned-out fuse indicates that there is a problem in the electrical circuit. If you replace a fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory is turned on, the problem is serious and should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair. Never replace a fuse with anything except a fuse with the same or a lower amperage rating. A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and create a fire hazard.

NOTE:

See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descriptions.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

30

CHECKING THE BATTERY

G210A01A-AAT

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING:

Batteries can be dangerous! When working with batteries, carefully observe the following precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself, immediately do the following:

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance.
If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your eyes with water and get medical assistance as soon as possible. While you are being driven to get medical assistance, continue to rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft cloth saturated with water.
If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large quantity of water or milk followed by milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get medical assistance as soon as possible.

While batteries are being charged (either by a battery charger or by the vehicle's alternator), they produce explosive gases. Always observe these warnings to prevent injuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.

G210B01Y-GET

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corrosion around the battery posts or terminals should be removed using a solution of household baking soda and warm water. After the battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light coating of grease.

WARNING:

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth until medical attention is received.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area.

If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery.

Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
o Never attempt to charge the battery when the battery cables are connected.
o The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

32

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING FANS

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan, so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on automatically if the engine coolant temperature is high.

G220001A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should come on automatically whenever the air conditioning is in operation.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A00A-GAT

Gasoline engine MAX MIN HFC5004

Diesel engine MAX MIN G230402FC

The power steering fluid level should be checked regularly.

To check the power steering fluid level, be sure the ignition is "OFF", then check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:

Grinding noise from the power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started. In extremely cold conditions (below - 20°C). If the noise stops during warm up, there is no abnormal function in the system. It is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions.

Recommended Fluid

Use PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:

Do not start the engine when the power steering oil reservoir is empty.

BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steering hose connections for fluid leakage at regular intervals. The power steering hoses should be replaced if there is severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose could cause premature failure.

G350001FC-GAT

(Diesel Engine)

Close-up of a car engine bay with a highlighted component and yellow arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The fuel system should be bled to remove air as described in the illustration if the fuel supply is exhausted during travel, when the fuel filter is replaced, or if the vehicle is not used for a long time.

1. Remove the air cap with pushing the button.

Air pipe G350B01FC

1. Pump the hand pump until there are no more bubbles in the fuel coming out of the air pipe. When doing this, place a cloth around the air pipe to prevent the escaping fuel from spewing about.
2. Replace the air cap when there are no more bubbles in the fuel.
3. Continue pumping until the hand pump becomes stiff.
4. Finally, check to be sure that there is no leakage of fuel. If in doubt, consult your nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

34

WARNING:

o Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system.
o Be sure to carefully wipe away any water drained out in this manner, because the fuel mixed in the water might be ignited and result in a fire.

REMOVAL OF WATER FROM THE FUEL FILTER

G300A01B-GAT

(Diesel Engine)

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible components and no text or symbols

If the fuel filter warning light illuminates during driving, it indicates that water has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs, remove the water as described.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Loosen the drain plug at the bottom of the fuel filter.
2. Tighten the drain plug when water no longer comes out.
3. Check to be sure that the warning lamp illuminates when the ignition key is turned to "ON", and that it goes off when the engine is started. If in doubt, consult your nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTE:

It is recommended that water accumulated in the fuel filter should be removed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A01FC-GAT

WARNING:

Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system.

Be sure to carefully wipe away any water drained out in this manner, because the fuel mixed in the water might be ignited and result in a fire.

Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press the front bumper and rear bumper down several times. Place the vehicle at a distance of 3,000 mm (118 in.) from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools).
4. Clean the head lights lens and turn on the headlight (low beam).

Vertical Aiming Horizontal Aiming G2B0A21FC

1. Open the hood.
2. Draw the vertical line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) and the horizontal line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen. And then, draw a horizontal parallel line at 30 mm (1.18 in.) under the horizontal line.
3. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL AIMING.
4. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to each vertical line with a phillips screwdriver - HORIZON-TAL AIMING.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

36

G290B02FC-GAT

Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement

LHD 30mm (1.18 in.) Horizontal line Vertical line W P* Cut-off line H L Ground line G250001L

RHD Horizontal line Vertical line W "P" Cut-off line 30mm (1.18 in.) L Ground line H G290B01L-D

If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced, the headlight aiming should

be checked using an aiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turn on the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is parallel to the center line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center of the headlights.

Specifications:

"H"

Horizontal center line of headlights from ground

675 mm (26.5 in.)

"W"

Distance between each headlight center

: 1,177 mm (46.3 in.)

"L"

Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against

: 3,000 mm (118 in.).

REPLACING HEADLIGHT BULBS

G200A03A-GAT

Before attempting to replace a head-light bulb, be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.

The next paragraph shows how to reach the headlight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same number and wattage rating.

See page 6-38 for the wattage descriptions.

CAUTION:

Keep the lamps out of contact with petroleum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

G270A02A-GAT

HEADLIGHT BULB

Replacement instructions:

Mechanical component diagram showing a cylindrical housing with mounting flanges and a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.
2. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base, avoid touching the glass.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb base in the back of the headlight.
4. Remove the dust cover.

Mechanical component diagram showing a cylindrical assembly with mounting holes and a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Push the bulb spring for removing the headlight bulb.
2. Remove the protective cap from the replacement bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Install the dust cover after retightening the bulb spring and reconnect the power cord.
3. Use the protective cap and carton to dispose of the old bulb.
4. Check for proper headlight aim.

WARNING:

The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn on the bulb only when installed in a headlight. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

38

BULB WATTAGE

G20DA02FC-GAT

1 2 6 8 3 4 5 7 12 11 10 9

G200402FC

No.	Part Name		Wattage	Socket type	No.	Part Name		Wattage	Socket type
1	Front Position Light		5	W2.1×9.5D	8	High Mounted Rear Stop Light		21	BA 15s
2	Head Light (High/Low)		60/55	P43t-38	9	License Plate Light		5	W2.1×9.5D
3	Front Fog Light (If installed)		55	PK22s	10	Rear Fog Light (If installed)		21	BA 15s
4	Front Turn Signal Light		21	BA 15s	11	Luggage Compartment Light		5	S8.5/8.5
5	Side Repeater (If installed)		5	W2.1×9.5D	12	Rear Combination Light	Turn Signal Light	21	BA 15s
6	Interior	Map Light	10	W2.1×9.5D			Stop/Tail Light	21/5	BAY 15d
		Room Light	10	S8.5/8.5			Back -up Light	21	BA 15s
7	Front Door Warning Light (If installed)		5	W2.1×4.6D

FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

39

G200C03FC-GAT

Engine Compartment

(Gasoline Engine)

9123-1780 USE THE DESIGNATED FURSES ONLY. ###

G200C03FC

DESCRIPTION	FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
ALT	120A	Generator
B+	40A	(A/CON, RR HTD, STOP, D/LOCK, HAZARD) Fuse
ECU	30A	Generator, Engine control relay, ECM
RAD	20A	Radiator fan relay
IGN	40A	Start relay, Ignition switch
BLR	40A	Blower relay
P/WIN	30A	Power window relay
COND	20A	Condenser fan relay #1
ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
F/PUMP	10A	Fuel pump relay
INJ	15A	Injector, Ignition coil
SNSR	10A	MAP sensor, Oxygen sensor, CP sensor, Knock sensor, Throttle position sensor
ROOM LP	10A	Audio, Room lamp, Overhead console lamp, Instrument cluster
DRL	15A	DRL control module
HORN	10A	Horn relay
A/CON	10A	A/C relay
FR FOG	15A	Front fog lamp relay
ECU	10A	ECM, TCM
LP	20A	Tail lamp relay
TAIL LH	10A	Left rear combi lamp, Left position lamp, Left License lamp
TAIL RH	10A	Right rear combi lamp, Right position lamp, Right License lamp
H/LP LH	15A	Left head lamp
H/LP RH	15A	Right head lamp, (H/LP IND) Fuse

NOTE:

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

40

G200E00FC-GAT

(Diesel Engine)

91213-17570 USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES ONLY. PTC HTR1 GLOW PLUG 40A HLERU 80A PTC HTR2 HLERU 40A FFHS HLERU 30A PTC HTR3 HLERU 40A USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES ONLY. ASUSHED DELIZATIONS CONJES DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS DE LAIS 91213-17570

G200E03FC

NOTE:

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
FUSE	ALT	140A	Generator
	B+	40A	(A/CON, RR HTD, STOP, D/LOCK, HAZARD) Fuse, Deicer
	ECU	30A	Generator, Engine control relay, ECM
	RAD	30A	Radiator fan relay
	IGN	40A	Start relay, Ignition switch
	BLR	40A	Blower relay
	P/WIN	30A	Power window relay
	COND	30A	Condenser fan relay #1
	ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
	ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
	F/PUMP	10A	Fuel pump relay
	ECU	30A	ECM No.5 (Batt+)
	ECU	10A	ECM No.4 (Batt+), Stop lamp switch, PTC heater relay #1
	SNSR	15A	Glow plug relay, Assistor heater relay 1/2, Stop lamp switch, TDC sensor, EGR act, Throttle plate act, VGT vacuum
	ROOM LP	10A	Audio, Room lamp, Overhead console lamp, Instrument cluster, ETACM, Luggage lamp
	DRL	15A	DRL control module
	HORN	10A	Horn relay
	A/CON	10A	A/C relay
	FR FOG	15A	Front fog lamp relay
	ECU	10A	ECM, TCM
	LP	20A	Tail lamp relay
	TAIL LH	10A	Left rear combi lamp, Left position lamp, Left License lamp
	TAIL RH	10A	Right rear combi lamp, Right position lamp, Right License lamp
	H/LP LH	15A	Left head lamp
	H/LP RH	15A	Right head lamp. (H/LP IND) Fuse
FUSIBLE LINK	PTC HTR 1	40A	PTC heater relay #1
	GLOW	80A	GLOW relay
	PTC HTR 2	40A	PTC heater relay #2
	FFHS	30A	FFHS relay
	PTC HTR 3	40A	PTC heater relay #3

G200D01FC-GAT

Inner Panel

USE	10A	10A	10A
	RR WPR	AUDIO	H/LP IND
	10A	15A	10A
	START	C/LIGHT	HTD IND
	20A	10A	10A
	FRT WPR	A/BAG	A/CON
	15A	10A	30A
	S/HTD	A/B IND	RR HTD
	25A	10A	10A
	P/OUTLET	T/SIG	STOP
	10A	15A	15A
	IG2	ECU	DR LOCK
	10A	10A	10A
	O/S MRR	ETACS	HAZARD

B200D01FC

DESCRIPTION	FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
H/LP IND	10A	Head lamp indicator
HTD IND	10A	Defogger relay, Left(Right) outside mirror motor, Rear window motor
A/CON	10A	A/C Switch
RR HTD	30A	Defogger relay
STOP	10A	Stop lamp switch, Power window relay
D/LOCK	15A	Door lock(unlock) relay, ETACM, Sunroof relay
HAZARD	10A	Burglar alarm relay, Hazard relay
AUDIO	10A	Audio
C/LIGHT	15A	Cigarette lighter
A/B	10A	SRS control module
A/B IND	10A	SRS IND.
T/SIG	10A	Hazard switch, Seat belt timer, Instrument cluster, ABS control module, Pre-excitation resistor, Washer motor
ECU	15A	ECM, Vehicle speed sensor, TCM, Ignition coil
ETACS	10A	ETACM, A/T Shift lever
RR WPR	10A	Rear wiper motor, Rear wiper relay
START	10A	Start relay
FRT WPR	20A	Wiper relay, Washer motor, Wiper & Defogger timer
S/HTD	15A	Left (Right) front seat warmer switch
P/OUTLET	25A	Front (Rear) power outlet
IG2	10A	ETACM, Power window relay, Defogger relay, Sunroof relay Head lamp relay, Blower relay
O/S MRR	10A	Outside mirror switch, Rear fog lamp relay

Emission Control System 7-2

Catalytic Converter 7-3

EGR System 7-4

7

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission control system to meet all requirements of the Emission prohibition rules of your province.

There are three emission control systems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

HD10B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control System

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, then passes through the PCV valve into the induction system.

H010C01E-GAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control System

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

Canister

While the engine is inoperative, fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the canis-

ter. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the induction system through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens so as to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

; For a gasoline engine

Illustration of a car with visible battery and charging cable (no text or symbols)

Catalytic Converter

HFC505

The catalytic converter is part of the exhaust emission control system. Its purpose is to remove certain engine emission products from the engine's exhaust. It looks something like a muffler and is located underneath the car in the exhaust system.

H020D01S-GAT

; For a diesel engine

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with oxidation type catalytic converter to reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and particulate contained in the exhaust gas.

H020B01A-GAT

About the Catalytic Converter

Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic converter cause it to operate at very high temperatures. As a result, the introduction of large amounts of unburned gasoline may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. This can be avoided by observing the following:

o Use unleaded fuel only.

o Maintain your engine in good condition. Extremely high converter temperatures can result from improper operation of the electrical, ignition or fuel injection systems.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is hard to start, take your car to your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible and have the difficulty corrected.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If your run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for periods longer than 10 minutes.
o Your Hyundai should not be either pushed or pulled to get it started. This can cause the catalytic converter to overload.
o Take care not to stop your Hyundai over any combustible material such as grass, paper, leaves or rags. As these materials could come in contact with the catalytic converter and could cause a fire.
Do not touch the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system while the engine is running as it is very hot and could result in burns.
o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is your best source of assistance.

EGR SYSTEM

H020C01S-GAT

; For a diesel engine

This system helps control oxides of nitrogen by recirculating a part of the exhaust gas into the engine.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 8-2

Engine Number 8-2

Recommended Inflation Pressures 8-3

Snow Tires 8-4

Tire Chains 8-4

Tire Rotation 8-5

Tire Balancing 8-5

Tire Traction 8-5

When to Replace Tires 8-6

Spare Tire and Tools 8-7

CONSUMER INFORMATION

2

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

I01DA01FC-GAT

Two technical illustrations of a car engine, showing open hood and internal components (no text or symbols)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

It can be found on the identification plate attached to apron panel located on the driver's side of the engine compartment.

I010B01A-GAT Engine Number

Gasoline engine (1.6 DOHC) K10802E

Gasoline engine (1.8 DOHC) SSA02106 Diesel engine 1010B02FC

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

TIRE

CONSUMER INFORMATION

8

1020A01A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundai are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

1030A01FC-GAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRESSURES

Side view of a car's side panel with a yellow arrow pointing to a tire (no text or symbols visible)

The tire label located on the driver's side "C" pillar outer panel gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

3

RIM SIZE	TIRE SIZE	PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
		UP TO 2 PERSONS		UP TO MAX LOAD
		FRONT	REAR	FRONT	REAR
5.5x14	186/65R14	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
5.5x15	195/55R15	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
6.0x15	205/65A15	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
3.5x15	7115/70D15	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)
3.5x15	7115/70R15	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)

These pressures were chosen to provide the most satisfactory combination of ride comfort, tire wear and stability under normal conditions. Tire pressures should be checked at least monthly. Proper tire inflation pressures should be maintained for these reasons:

o Lower-than-recommended tire pressures cause uneven tread wear and poor handling.
o Higher-than-recommended tire pressures increase the chance of damage from impacts and cause uneven tread wear.

CAUTION:

Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tires are cold. That is, after the car has been parked for at least three hours and hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km or one mile since starting up.
o Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
o Never overload your car. Be especially careful about overloading if you equip your car with a luggage rack or car top carrier.

I040A01S-GAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when your car is equipped with snow tires.

ID50A01E-GAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.

WARNING:

o When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, drive at less than 30 km/h (20 mph).
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire & plastic chains.
o If you have noise caused by chains contacting the body, re-tighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, re-tighten the chains after driving 0.5 \~ 1 km.

I06DA01FC-GAT

TIRE ROTATION

Spare tire HA1400

Tires should be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly between rotations, have the car checked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause may be corrected.

After rotating, adjust the tire pressures and be sure to check wheel nut torque.

WARNING:

o Do not use the temporary spare tire for tire rotation.
Do not mix bias-ply and radially tires under any circumstances. This may cause dangerous handling characteristics.

ID70A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affect handling and tire wear. The tires on your Hyundai were balanced before the car was delivered but may need balancing again during the years you own the car.

Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, it should be rebalanced before being reinstalled on the car.

ID80A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

1030A01HP-GAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

Wear indicator 03G402FC

The original tires on your car have tread wear indicators. The tread wear indicators appear when the tread depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tire should be replaced when these appear as a solid bar across two or more grooves of the tread. Always replace your tires with those of the recommended size. If you change wheels, the new wheel's rim width and offset must meet Hyundai specification.

WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous! Worn-out tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control and traction. When replacing tires, never mix radial and blas-ply tires on the same car. If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed in sets of four.
o Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability.

Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity.

If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving.

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

CONSUMER INFORMATION

8

7

H00AD1FC-GAT

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a gear and valve (no text or symbols)

D050B01FC

Your Hyundai is delivered with the following:

Spare tire and wheel

Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar, Span-

ner, Screw driver

Jack

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement 9-2

Engine 9-3

Lubrication Chart 9-4

9

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A01FC-GAT
MEASUREMENT
mm (in.)

Overall length		4,025(158.4)
Overall width		1,740(68.5)
Overall height (unladen)		1,635(64.3)*1,685(66.3)
Wheel base		2,600(102.3)
Wheel tread	Front	1,485(58.5)
	Rear	1,485(58.5)

*Installed roof rack

J020A01EC-GAT
POWER STEERING

Type	Rack and pinion
Wheel free play	0 - 30 mm (0 - 1.18 in.)
Rack stroke	146±1mm (5.7±0.04 in.)
Oil pump type	Vane type

J060401S-GAT
FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel tank capacity	Liter	US.gal	Imp.gal
	55	14.5	12

J030A01FC-GAT
TIRE

Standard	185/65 R14
Option	195/55 R15205/55 R15 (1.8 DOHC only)

J030B01FC-GAT
SPARE TIRE

Standard	Temporary
Option	Full size

JORDASEC-GAT
ELECTRICAL

Item	GASOLINE	DIESEL
Battery	MF45AH, MF60AH(12V)	CMF 68 AH
Generator	90A (13.5V)	120A (12V)

J050A01FC-GAT
BRAKE

Type	Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type	Ventilated disc
Rear brake type	Drum
Parking brake	Cable

ENGINE

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

JD70A04FC-GAT

ITEMS				GASOLINE	DIESEL
Engine Type				1.6/1.8 4Cylinder in-line DOHC	1.5 4Cylinder in-line DOHC
Idle Speed (RPM)	A/CON OFF			800 ± 100 (1.6L), 750 ± 100 (1.8 L)	740 ± 100
	A/CON ON			800 ± 100 (1.6L), 800 ± 100 (1.8 L)
Spark Plug	Unleaded	NGK		BKR5ES-11	-
		CHAMPION		RC10YC4	-
	Leaded	NGK		BKR5ES	-
		CHAMPION		RC10YC	-
Spark Plug Gap	Unleaded			1.0 ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.)	-
	Leaded			0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.)	-
Valve Clearance(Cold engine: 20 ± 5^ )	For adjusting		Intake	Auto Lash (1.6 DOHC)0.17 ~ 0.23 mm (0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.) (1.8DOHC)	Auto Lash
			Exhaust	Auto Lash (1.6 DOHC)0.25 ~ 0.31 mm (0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.) (1.8 DOHC)
	For checking		Intake	Auto Lash (1.6 DOHC)0.12 ~ 0.28 mm (0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.) (1.8 DOHC)	Auto Lash
			Exhaust	Auto Lash (1.6 DOHC)0.20 ~ 0.38 mm (0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.) (1.8 DOHC)
Ignition Timing				BTDC 5^ ± 5^ (1.6L), BTDC 7^ ± 5^ (1.8L)	-
Firing Order				1 - 3 - 4 - 2	1 - 3 - 4 - 2

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A07FC-GAT

Item		Oil & Grease Standard		Q'ty (liter)
Engine Oil Gasoline		API SJ, SL SAE or ABOVE, SAE	5W-20, 5W-30	1.6 DOHC - 3.3 (with oil filter)(3.5 us.qts., 2.9 Imp.qts)
			10W-30 (ABOVE -18°C)
		ILSAC GF-3 SAE or ABOVE SAE	15W-40 (ABOVE -13°C)	1.8 DOHC - 4.0 (with oil filter)(4.2 us.qts., 3.5 Imp.qts)
			20W-50 (ABOVE -7°C)
	Diesel	API CH-4 SAE 30 or ABOVE, SAE	(0°C ~ 40°C)	1.5 CRDI - 5.3 (with oil filter)(5.6 us.qts., 4.7 Imp.qts)
RecommendsShellHELIXMotor oils		ACEA B4 SAE 1 or ABOVE SAE	20W-40 (ABOVE -10°C)
			5W-40 (ABOVE -15°C)
			10W-30 (-20°C ~ 40°C)
			SAE 5W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
			SAE 0W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1, *2
		*1. Restricted to driving condition and area
		*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Engine oil consumption		Normal driving condition		MAX. 1L / 1,500 Km
		Severe driving condition		MAX. 1L / 1,000 Km
Transaxie Mahual		HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)		2.15 (2.3 us. qts., 1.86 Imp. qts)2.0 (2.11 us. qts., 1.76 Imp. qts) (1.5 CRDI)
				6.1 (6.4 us. qts., 5.3 Imp.qts) (1.6 DOHC)6.7 (7.0 us. qts., 5.8 Imp.qts) (1.8 DOHC)
		Automatic	HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,
Power steering		PSF-3		As required
Brake fluid		DOT 3, DOT 4 or equivalent		As required
Coolant		Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator		Gasoline : 6.2(1.6 DOHC), 6.5(1.8 DOHC)Diesel : 6.3

INDEX

10

Side view of a silver minivan with a roof and side grille (no visible text or symbols)

A

Accessory Tray 1-72

Air Bag 1-37

Air Cleaner Filter 6-15

Air Conditioning

Care 6-24

Operation 6-24

Switch 1-89

Air Conditioner Filter 1-99

Antenna 1-133

Ashtray 1-66

Audio System 1-102

Auto Fuel Cut Switch 1-82

B

Battery 2-21, 6-32

Bleeding The Fuel System 6-33

Brake

Anti-lock system 2-13

Brake traction control system 2-14

Checking the brakes 6-21

Fluid 6-22

Pedal clearance 6-27

Pedal free play 6-27

Practices 2-17

Brake Pad Wear Warning Sound 1-53

Brake Traction Control System 2-14

Breaking-In your new Hyundai 1-3

Bulbs Wattage 6-38

C

Care of Cassette Tapes 1-132

Care of Disc 1-131

Cargo Area Cover 1-81

Cassette Tape Player Operation (H220, H280)......

1-108, 1-122

Catalytic Converter 7-3

CD Auto changer 1-79

CD Auto Changer (H260, H280).... 1-116, 1-127

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock 1-9

Child Restraint System 1-28 \~ 1-34

Cigarette Lighter 1-65

Clutch

Checking fluid 6-23

Pedal free play 6-26

Combination Light

Headlight flasher 1-60

Headlight switch 1-59

High-beam switch 1-60

Lane change signal 1-59

Turn signal operation 1-59

Compact Disc Player Operation (H260, H280) ....

1-113, 1-124

Cooling Fans 6-32

Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior 4-5

Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion 4-2

Washing and waxing 4-4

D

Defrosting/Defogging 1-88

Digital Clock 1-65

Door

Central door lock 1-9

Child-protector rear door lock 1-9

Door locks 1-7

Locking and unlocking front doors with a key 1-7

Drink Holder 1-67

Drive Belts 6-29

Driving

Economical driving 2-18

Smooth cornering 2-19

Winter driving 2-20

E

EGR System 7-4

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) 2-16

Emissions Control Systems 7-2

Engine

Before starting the engine 2-3

Compartment 6-2 \~ 6-4

Coolant 6-12

Coolant temperature gauge 1-54

If the engine overheats 3-4

Number 8-2

Oil 6-6

Starting 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous 2-2

F

Fog Light

Front fog light switch 1-63

Rear fog light switch 1-64

Fold-up Tray 1-76

Front Seats

Adjustable front seats 1-14

Lumbar support control 1-16

Seat cushion height adjustment 1-16

Fuel

Capacity 9-2

Gauge 1-54

Recommendations 1-2

Fuel Filler Lid

Remote release 1-77

Fuse Panel Description 6-39

Fuses 6-29

G

General Checks 6-5

Glove box 1-73

H

Hazard Warning System 1-62

Headlight Aiming Adjustment.... 6-35

Headlight Bulb 6-37

Headlight Leveling Device System 1-64

Heating and Cooling Control 1-83

10 INDEX

4

Heating and Ventilation
Air flow control.... 1-85
Air intake control 1-87
Bi-level heating 1-88
Fan speed control 1-84
Heating controls 1-87
Temperature control 1-84
High-mounted Rear Stoplight 1-76
Hood Release 1-76
Hom 1-82

|
Ignition Switch 2-3
Immobilizer System 1-5
Instrument Cluster and Indicator 1-44 \~ 1-47
Interior Light
Interior light 1-71
Map light 1-71
Intermittent Wiper 1-62

J
Jump Starting 3-3

K
Keys 1-4
If you lose your keys 3-15
Positions 2-4

L
Lubrication Chart....9-4
Luggage Net 1-80

M

Maintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..... 5-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions 5-7

Scheduled maintenance 5-4 - 5-6

Service requirements 5-2

Mirror

Day-night inside rearview 1-75

Outside rearview 1-73

Multi Box 1-72

0

Odometer 1-56

Outside Rearview Mirror Heater 1-74

P

Parking Brake 1-68

Power Outlet 1-66

Power Steering Fluid Level 6-32

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt 1-35

R

Rear Fog Audible Warning Sound 1-53

Rear Seat

Adjustable headrests....1-18

Adjusting seatback angle 1-17

Adjusting seat forward and rearward 1-17

Arm Rest 1-68

Fold down 1-18

Rear Window Defroster Switch 1-63

Recommended Shift Points 2-8

Removal of water from the fuel filter 6-34

Replacing Light Bulbs 6-36

Roof Rack 1-81

s

Seat Belts

2-Point Static Type 1-26

3-Point system 1-24

Adjustable height 1-23

Adjusting your seat belt.... 1-25, 1-26

Care of seat belts 1-23

Precautions.... 1-21

Seat Warmer 1-20

Spectacle Case 1-72

Speedometer 1-55

Starting Procedures 2-5

Steering Wheel

Free play 6-26

Tilt lever 1-82

Stereo Radio Operation (H210, H220, H260, H280)

1-102, 1-105, 1-110, 1-119

Stereo Sound System 1-99

Sunroof 1-68

Sunshade 1-68

Sun Visor 1-75

T

Tail Gate 1-79

Tail Gate Wiper And Washer Switch 1-62

Tachometer 1-55

Theft Alarm System 1-10

Tires

Balancing 8-5

Chains 8-4

Changing a flat tire 3-7

If you have a flat tire 3-7

Information 8-3

Pressure 8-3

Replacement 8-6

Rotation 8-5

Snow tires 8-4

Spare tire 3-6

Traction 8-5

Towing

A trailer (or vehicle) 2-23

Emergency 3-14

If your car must be towed 3-12

10 INDEX

6

Transaxle

Automatic 2-9

Automatic transaxle fluid checking 6-19

Manual 2-7

Manual transaxle oil checking 6-18

Trip Computer 1-57

Trip Odometer 1-56

U

Under Tray 1-17

v

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 8-2

Vehicle Specification 9-2

Ventilation

Center ventilator 1-83

Side ventilator 1-83

W

Warning and Indicator Light....1-48

Windows

Manual 1-13

Power 1-13

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch 1-61

Windshield Wiper Blades 6-16

HYUNDAI

Owner's Manual

MATRIX LAVITA

일반영어

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Seoul Korea

Printing : JUN. 15, 2006

Publication No.:A170-EE66R

Printed in Korea

Color palette bar and dot grid with no text or symbols

HYUNDAI MATRIX SAD10AI-E OWNER'S MANUAL Operation Maintenance Specifications

HFC001-2D

The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.

This manual applies to all markets and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.

Please refer to the nearest franchised Hyundai authorised repairer for information regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.

SA020A1-E

Responsibility For Maintenance

It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner/driver to ensure that all routine maintenance services are undertaken in line with the recommendations specified in Section 5 of this manual. In addition, in order to ensure continued validity of the new vehicle warranty and safe operation of the vehicle, non scheduled maintenance/running repairs should be undertaken at the earliest available opportunity.

Under severe operating conditions, more frequent maintenance is required. Details of the maintenance schedule for such conditions are also given in section 5. It is recommended that all maintenance operations and repairs are entrusted to a franchised Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that the latest repair methods, specialised tooling and genuine Hyundai parts are used to ensure the continued reliability and safety of the vehicle.

F2

fcuk-0.p65 12/27/2006, 10:10 AM2

SA030A1-E

FOREWORD

Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction methods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commitment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equally proud.

This owners manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained. The recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a franchised Hyundai authorised repairer ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the continued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.

Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.

Note: This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of reference.

In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.

CAUTION:

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2006 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

SA040A1-E

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle. Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification without the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

SA050A1-E

TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION

This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled equipment. It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adversely affect these systems. Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recommended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

F4

fcuk-0.p65 12/27/2006, 10:10 AM4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

fcuk-0.p65 12/27/2006, 10:10 AM5

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3

APPEARANCE CARE 4

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

A10DA1L-EAT GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS 1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are de- signed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers. 2. Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Using imitation, counter- feit or used salvage parts is not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai war- ranty. In addition, any damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imita- tion, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by Hyundai Motor Com- pany. 3. How can you tell If you are purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). The export specifications are written in English only. Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorised Hyundai repairs. HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAI | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts HYUNDAIA | Genuine Parts

folk-0.p65 12/27/2006, 10:10 AM?

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A02FC-EAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 13 F8 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B250B02FC-D

fcuk-0.p65 12/27/2006, 10:10 AM8

Color palette bar with grayscale swatches and a crosshair symbol (no text or labels)

1. Passenger's Side Drink Holder
2. Passenger's Airbag
3. Accessory Tray
4. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (Not all models)
5. Hazard Warning Light
6. Instrument Cluster
7. Electronic Stability program (ESP) switch (Not all models)
8. Windscreen Wiper/Washer Switch
9. Horn and Driver's Airbag
10. Indicator and Warning Light

11. Multi-Function Light Switch

12. Front Fog Light Switch (Not all models)

13. Headlight Leveling Switch
14. Rear Fog Light Switch
15. Centre Console (Not all models)
16. Glove Box
17. Parking Brake Lever
18. Drink Holder
19. Shift Lever (Not all models)
20. Cigar Lighter
21. Ashtray
22. Multi Box
23. Bonnet Release Lever

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface.

If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts.

If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

Color palette bar and dot grid with no text or symbols

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A02FC-EAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (Not all models)

Hatchback Door Open Warning Light

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (Not all models)

Door Open (Ajar) Warning Light

Traction Control Indicator Light (Not all models)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

ESP OFF Electronic Stability Program Indicator Lights (Not all models)

Malfunction Indicator Light

O/D OFF Indicator Light (Not all models)

ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (SRI) (Not all models)

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel)

Charging System Warning Light

Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel)

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-44.

F10

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel Recommendations 1-2

Running In 1-3

Immobiliser System 1-4

Door 1-5

Anti-Theft Alarm System.... 1-8

Window 1-11

Seat 1-12

Seat Belts 1-19

Child Restraint System 1-24

Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System ....1-33

Instrument Cluster and Indicator 1-40

Warning Light and Indicator Lights....1-44

Trip Computer 1-52

Multi-Function Switch 1-54

Windscreen Wiper/Washer Switch 1-55

Sunroof 1-63

Mirror 1-67

Bonnet Release 1-70

Heating and Cooling Control 1-76

Stereo Sound System 1-92

Antenna 1-95

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010A04O-EAT

PETROL ENGINES

THIS VEHICLE MUST ONLY BE OP-ERATED WITH UNLEADED FUEL. SERIOUS DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM THE USE OF LEADED FUEL.

UNLEADED FUEL ONLY B010AC2FC-D

For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.

You may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON 91-94/AKI 87-90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle.

To prevent accidental charging of the fuel tank with leaded fuel, a small diameter filler neck along with a restrictor flap are fitted to ensure that only unleaded fuel pump nozzles may enter the filler neck.

However, care must be exercised when refuelling the vehicle tank from fuel can or by means of a funnel that the fuel being used is unleaded.

The use of leaded fuel in this vehicle will result in irreversible pollution of the catalyst element. Such pollution will prevent correct operation of the catalyst and give rise to increased operating temperatures leading to the catalyst element melting and restricting the exhaust flow along with an increase in exhaust emission levels.

CAUTION: The vehicle warranty will not extend to damage arising from the use of incorrect fuels.

DIESEL ENGINES

Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is used in Hyundai vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions.

o Above 23°F (-5°C) ... Summer type diesel fuel.
o Below 23°F (-5°C) ... Winter type diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel gauge very carefully: If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION:

Do not let any petrol or water enter the tank. This would make it necessary to drain it out and to bleed the lines to avoid siezing the injection pump and damaging the engine.

RUNNING IN 3 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

ZB010C1-E

"Alternative fuels"

Fuels which contain methanol or ethanol must not be used.

ZB01001-E

Operation In Foreign Countries

Drivers of vehicles which are to be operated in foreign countries must satisfy themselves that:

o The vehicle meets all local regulations with respect to insurance, specifications etc..

o The correct types and grades of fuel are available for satisfactory operation of the vehicle.

ZB010F2-A

Fuels for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recommends that you use fuels treated with detergent additives, which help to prevent deposit formation in the engine. These fuels will help the engines run cleaner and increase the Emission Control System performance.

B020A02FC-EAT

Petrol Engine

The longevity and performance of the vehicle are greatly affected by the care exercised during the first 1,000 miles of motoring. Because of modern manufacturing techniques, rigid guidelines regarding maximum road speeds have become unnecessary. However, certain precautions should be observed in order to obtain the best possible performance and useful life from the vehicle.

1) Do not race the engine without a load (i.e revving the engine in neutral).
2) During the first 500 miles the maximum engine speed should be restricted to 3,000 rpm and gradually increased thereafter.
3) Avoid prolonged constant speed operation. The internal components will become run in more quickly if the operation speed is varied during the running-in period.
4) Never allow the engine to labour. Use the gearbox freely and avoid large throttle open-ings when the engine speed is below 1,500 rpm.

5) Avoid rapid acceleration and maximum throttle openings.
6) Avoid harsh braking during the first 100 miles of urban motoring or 1,000 miles of motorway driving to allow the friction facings of the brake pads and shoes to bed against the discs and drums properly.
7) No trailer towing should be undertaken during the running in period.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4

B020B02FC-EAT

Diesel Engine

The longevity and performance of the vehicle are greatly affected by the care exercised during the first 1,000 miles of motoring. Because of modern manufacturing techniques, rigid guidelines regarding maximum road speeds have become unnecessary. However, certain precautions should be observed in order to obtain the best possible performance and useful life from the vehicle.

1) Do not race the engine without a load (i.e revving the engine in neutral).
2) During the first 600 miles the maximum engine speed should be restricted to 3,000 rpm and gradually increased thereafter. And whilst driving, keep under three quarters of maximum vehicle speed.
3) Avoid prolonged constant speed operation. The internal components of the engine will become run in more quickly if the operation speed is varied during the running in period.
4) Never allow the engine to labour. Use the gearbox freely and avoid large throttle open-ings when the engine speed is below 1,500 rpm.

IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

5) Avoid rapid acceleration and maximum throttle openings.
6) Avoid harsh braking during the first 100 miles of urban motoring or 1,000 miles of motorway driving to allow the friction facings of the brake pads and shoes to bed against the discs and drums properly.
7) No trailer towing should be undertaken during the running in period.

6SB035A1-FE

The immobiliser system is an anti-theft device, designed to prevent and deter automobile theft.

BBB0B0GA-GAT

Keys

Illustration of two key sets with no text or symbols on the keys or background

All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are operated by the same key. However, since it is possible to lock the doors without the use of the key, care should be exercised to ensure that the key does not become locked inside the vehicle by mistake.

NOTE:

A non-genuine duplicate key will not start the engine.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 DOOR 5

B88DC02A-GAT

Key Numbers

R0123 AX10090A

The vehicle key number is recorded on a metal tag attached to the keys when the vehicle is first delivered to you. The key number should be recorded and kept in a safe place in case the need to order further keys arises. New keys are available from any Hyundai authorised repairer by quoting the relevant key number.

In the interest of security, the metal tag attached to the keys which bears the key number should be removed from the key ring after you receive your new vehicle. In addition, key numbers cannot be provided by Hyundai for security reasons.

If you need additional keys or if you should lose your keys, your Hyundai authorised repairer can make new keys.

B040A02Y-EAT

DOOR LOCKS

WARNING:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Before you drive away (especially if there are children in the car), be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be inadvertently opened from the inside. This helps ensure that doors will not be opened accidentally. Also, when combined with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
o In case of accident the door is unlocked automatically (Not all models)

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

6

SB04081-E

Locking, Unlocking Front Doors With Key

UNLOCK LOCK HFC2004-D

o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key.
o Lock the door by turning the key clockwise and unlock it by turning the key counterclockwise.

B040C01FC-EAT

Locking From The Outside

Diagram of a car door panel with a highlighted door and yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The doors can be locked without a key. To lock the doors from the outside, first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position, so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door.

The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when the front doors are closed. This is normal. (Not all models)

NOTE:

o When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and tail gate when leaving your vehicle unattended.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:11 AM6

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 7

SB040D1-F

Locking From The Inside

LOCK UNLOCK HFC2005-D

To lock the doors from inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position.

When this is done, the door cannot be opened using either the inside or the outside door handle.

NOTE:

When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible and the character "LOCK" on the switch is visible.

SB040F2-E

Child-proof Rear Door Lock

HFC2006-D

The rear doors are fitted with child proof locks to prevent accidental opening of the doors using the inside door handle, whilst allowing access by means of the outside handle (such as is required in the event of an accident for example) provided that the door lock button is at the unlocked position. Use of the child proof lock mechanism is recommended when children are carried in the vehicle. The child proof lock mechanism may be activated by opening the door and moving the lever located by the door latch to the " locked position. Move the lever to the " unlocked position when normal door operation is desired.

SB040G2-F

Central Door Locking (Not all models)

Medical illustration of a car interior with a highlighted device (no text or symbols present)

B040G01FC-D

The central door locking is operated by pushing the driver's door lock switch toward the front or rear of the vehicle. If the passenger and rear doors are open when the switch is pushed, the door will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:

o When pushing the switch toward the rear, all doors and tail gate will unlock.

When pushing the switch toward the front, all doors and tail gate will lock.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

8

• When the door is unlocked, the red mark on the switch is visible and the character "LOCK" on the switch is visible.
  The central door locking is operated by turning the key (with theft-alarm system: driver's door and passenger's door, without theft-alarm system: driver's door only) toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
  If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

B040H02L-EAT

Speed Sensing Auto Door Locking (Not all models)

When the speed of the vehicle keeps above 40KM/H for 2-3 seconds, it will automatically lock all doors for driver and passenger's safety.

But, the ignition key is removed, it will automatically unlock all doors.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-EAT

(Not all models)

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorised entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal lights.

B0/DB01O-DAT

Armed Stage

UNLOCK LOCK 007681012000

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine bonnet, doors and tail gate are closed.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:

1) If any door, the tail gate or bonnet remains open, the system will not be armed.
2) If this happens, rearm the system as described above.

CAUTION:

Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. If the system is armed whilst a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 9

B070C01FC-EAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs whilst the car is parked and the system is armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter.
2) The tail gate is opened without using the transmitter.
3) The bonnet is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and the turn signal lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds. To turn off the system, unlock the door or tail gate with the transmitter.

B0700020-AAT

Disarmed Stage

Two key holders, one with a yellow tip and the other with a black handle (no text or symbols visible)

The system will be disarmed when the driver's or passenger's door is unlocked by depressing the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

After completion of the step above, the turn signal light will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:

Once the system has been disarmed, it can not be rearmed except by repeating the arming procedures.

CAUTION:

Only the transmitter can disarm the armed stage. If the transmitter does not disarm the system, it is necessary to take the following steps;

1. Unlock the door with the key, which will cause, the alarm to be activated.
2. Insert the key in the ignition key cylinder and turn the ignition key to "ON" position.
3. Wait for 30 seconds.

After completion of the steps above, the system will be disarmed.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

10

B070F02A-EAT

Keyless Entry System (Not all models)

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal light will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
2. At the same time all doors unlock, the turn signal light will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:

The transmitter will not work if any of following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit (10 m).

• The battery in the transmitter is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

NOTE:

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.

B070E02HP-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery becomes weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replacement instructions:

Screwdriver MSC-0048-1

1. Separate the case with a blade screw-driver as shown in the illustration.

WINDOWS CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 11

Case Battery MSO-0048-2

1. Before removing the battery note its position and ensure the new battery is fitted the same + side (positive) facing down, then insert it into transmitter.

SB050A1-E MANUAL WINDOWS B050A01FC-D

The front door windows may be opened or closed by turning the window regulator handle. Ensure that when the windows are closed, nothing may become trapped between the glass and the door frame.

WARNING: When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's arms and hands are safely out of the way.

B000ACGE-EAT POWER WINDOWS (Not all models)

Close Open (1) B060A01FC-D

The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main switches are located on the driver's armrest and control the front and rear windows on both sides of the vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the appropriate window switch and closed by pulling up the switch. To open the window on the driver's side, press the switch(1) down. The window moves as long as the switch is operated.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

12

SEAT

B000A01FC-EAT

SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Diagram of a car interior showing a door handle and keyhole, with no visible text or symbols.

In order to prevent operation of the passenger front and rear windows, a window lock switch is provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To disable the power windows, press the window lock switch.

To return to normal operation, press the window lock switch a second time.

Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side)

The Auto-Down window is moved to its twitch. To stop at the desired loction, the switch must be pulled up.

WARNING:

Front seat adjustments must not be undertaken whilst the vehicle is in motion. Loss of control of the vehicle may result if seat adjustments are made whilst the vehicle is in motion.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 13

B000002FC-EAT

FRONT SEATS

Front Seat Rake Adjustment

Diagram of a car seat assembly with a highlighted side view showing a yellow arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

The front seat rake adjustment is performed by raising the lever at the front of the seat base and sliding the seat to the desired position. At this position the lever should be released and the seat rocked to and fro to ensure that the mechanism has locked.

SB070C1-E

Front Seat Recline Adjustment

Illustration of a car seat with a highlighted seat component (no text or symbols)

The front seat back recline angle may be adjusted by leaning forward slightly and raising the recline adjustment lever at the side of the seat. When the seatback is at the desired angle, the lever should be released. Ensure that the seatback is locked before driving the vehicle.

SB070D3-E

Head Restraint Adjustment

Lock Knob HFC2028

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push it down whilst pressing the lock knob. For maximum effectiveness in the event of an accident, the restraint must be adjusted so that the restraint is approximately at the level of the seat occupant's eyes. The restraint must never be so adjusted that it is centred about the level of the seat occupant's neck.

WARNING:

To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever.

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

14

WARNING:

Illustration of a person sitting in a chair, viewed from the side (no text or symbols present)

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the head restraint should be adjusted so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback should not be recommended.
Do not operate vehicle with the head restraints removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Head restraints may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the head restraint height whilst the vehicle is in motion.

SB070E1-E

Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's seat only)(Not all models)

2 1 HFC2027-D

Some models are fitted with adjustable driver seat lumbar support which may be used to increase the amount of lumbar support offered by the seat back. Adjustment is performed by moving the handle at the side of the backrest in a forward direction to increase the support.

1. Maximum Support
2. Minimum Support

SB070F1-E

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only)(Not all models)

HFC2026-D

To raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion, turn the front knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

To raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion, turn the rear knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 15

B00DG01FC-EAT

UNDER TRAY (Not all models)

3D rendered mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The tray is located under the front passenger seat. It is opened by up and pulling forward.

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the tray should be kept closed when the car is in motion.

B0B0H01FC-GAT

REAR SEAT

Seat Rake Adjustment

Interior view of a car seat with a highlighted device and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

The front seat rake adjustment is performed by raising the lever at the front of the seat base and sliding the seat to the desired position. At this position the lever should be released and the seat rocked to and fro to ensure that the mechanism has locked.

B000101FC-BAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Seatback folding lever HFC2061

To recline the seatback, push the seatback folding lever toward the head-rest, and release it after the desired seatback angle is achieved.

When you recline the seatback to desired position, always be sure it has locked into position.

CAUTION:

When reclining the seatback, you should adjust the seatback folding lever whilst standing.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

16

SB070DQ-E

Head Restraint Adjustment

Lock Knob B00U41FC

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push it down whilst pressing the lock knob. For maximum effectiveness in the event of an accident, the restraint must be adjusted so that the restraint is approximately at the level of the seat occupant's eyes. The restraint must never be so adjusted that it is centred about the level of the seat occupant's neck.

WARNING:

Illustration of a woman seated in a chair, wearing a collared shirt and dark jacket (no text or symbols visible)

o For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the head restraint should be adjusted so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback should not be recommended.

Do not operate vehicle with the head restraints removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Head restraints may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the head restraint height whilst the vehicle is in motion.

B000B01FC-GAT

Folding Rear Seatback and Seat Cushion

For greater convenience, the entire seatback anad seat cushion may be folded down and up.

Car seat assembly diagram showing front and rear seats with yellow directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Move the rear seat to the rearmost position.

2. Remove the head restraints.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 17

1. To fold down the seatback, push and hold the seatback folding lever toward the head restraints, then push down the seatback.

Seat cushion release lever HFC2076

1. Pull the seat cushion release lever upward, then fold up the seat cushion.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage, ensure that the rear drinkholder, located in the rear console, is closed before folding the rear seatback and seat cushion.

Securing strap HFC2076

1. To secure the seat, hook the securing strap under the seat cushion to the headrest stay of front driver and passenger seat.
2. Insert the removed headrests between the seatback and seat cushion, so that they will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.
3. To return the seatback and seat cushion to its normal position, reverse the above procedure.
   When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it is locked into position by pulling and pushing on the top of seatback.

WARNING:

When you return the folded down seat back to its upright position, make sure the seat belts are in position to be accessible and to function properly.
The purpose of the fold down rear seat back and the fold forward rear seat cushion is to increase cargo space. Do not allow passengers to sit in the cargo area whilst the car is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use when the seat back is folded down. Passengers who are not properly seated and wearing seat belts could sustain serious injuries or death in case of an accident or a sudden stop.
o Objects should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

18

SEAT WARMER

When you return the folded down seatback to its upright position, always be sure to install the headrests in their proper positions. Head restraints are important to the safety of occupants in a rear collision. If the headrests are not installed in their proper position, serious injury or death could result if a rear end collision occurs.

B100A02FC-EAT

(Not all models)

Close-up of a car dashboard with control buttons and a handle (no visible text or symbols)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. When the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:

The seat warmer will not operate if ambient temperature is warm enough.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to induce injury through inappropriate use of the seat warmer to infants, young children, the elderly and infirm persons suffering the effects of illness and medication.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:11 AM18

REAR SEAT WARNING SEAT BELTS CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 19

B140A01B-GAT

Rear view of a silver SUV with a yellow prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the car or background)

For the safety of all vehicle occupants, luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the top of the seatback.
SB090A1-E

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

Seat belts should be worn at all times by all occupants front and rear. The possibility of injury or the severity of injuries suffered in the event of an accident will be greatly reduced by the wearing of seat belts. In addition the following recommendations should be observed.

SB090B1-E

Babies/Small Children

Babies and small children must be restrained using a restraint system specifically designed for this purpose. Under no circumstances should a child be carried in the vehicle without the use of a suitable restraint which meets the regulations in force in the country where the vehicle is in operation.

SB090C1-E

Larger Children

Larger children should occupy the rear seat and be restrained at all times. The restraint may take the form of a special safety belt or the original factory fitted seat belt used in conjunction with an approved booster cushion depending upon the size and weight of the child. Under no circumstances should children be allowed to travel standing, kneeling or lying on the seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.

SB0001-E

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women. The seat belt should be worn as low and snugly as possible across the hips, not across the abdomen. A qualified Medical Practitioner should be consulted for further information.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

20

SB090E1-E

Injured Persons

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. For specific recommendations, the advice of a qualified Medical Practitioner should be sought.

SB000F1-B

Seat Belt Occupancy

The seat belts are designed to be used by one seat occupant only. The use of a seat belt by more than one person increases the levels of injury which may be sustained in the event of an accident.

SE080G1-E

Do Not Lie Down

To ensure that the maximum level of protection may be afforded by the seat belt system, all passengers should be sitting in an upright position throughout the journey. The seat belt will be unable to afford maximum protection if the front seats are at or near the fully reclined position.

SB090H1-E

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt assemblies must never be disassembled or modified in any way. In addition, care should be exercised to ensure that the belt assemblies do not become damaged by being trapped in seat mechanisms, door shuts etc.

SP001-F

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible. Under no circumstances must any part of the seat belt assemblies be dismantled or repaired.

SB090J1-F

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used since the fabric may become damaged and weakened.

SB090K1-E

Replacement of Seat Belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be inspected by an authorized repairer if the vehicle has been involved in an accident even if no damage is evident. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to a Hyundai authorised repairer.

B170A04A-EAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER BELT

(Not all models)

Mechanical component diagram showing a belt buckle with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of 4 positions.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 21

If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To lower it, push it down whilst pressing the height adjuster button.

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the release button to make sure that it has locked into position.

B180A1A-EAT SEAT BELTS (3-Point Type) To Fasten The Seat Belt

Illustration of a person using a bandage to adjust or install a yellow object on a seated leg (no text or symbols visible)

The seat belts are fastened by pulling the belt buckle towards the seat belt stalk and inserting the metal tongue of the buckle into the stalk.

The buckle should be firmly pressed into the stalk until locked which will be indicated by an audible "click".

The length of the seat belt webbing will be automatically adjusted by the seat belt mechanism to allow the wearer maximum freedom of movement whilst the belt is being worn. However, in the event of rapid deceleration or impact, the belt mechanism will automatically lock.

The mechanism will also lock if the seat belt webbing is withdrawn too quickly when the belt is being fastened or if attempts are made to withdraw the webbing whilst the vehicle is not on level ground. Should the seat belt lock under these conditions, it will be possible to release the mechanism by allowing a small amount of webbing to be retracted and the belt withdrawn again.

WARNING: o The height adjuster must be in the locked position when the vehicle is moving. o The misadjustment of height of the shoulder belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.

NOTE: When pulling the seat belt buckle towards the fastening position make sure the webbing is not twisted.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

22

B200A01S-GAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

Illustration of a person using a seatbelt and belt (no text or symbols)

You should place the belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

If the belt is located too high on your body, you could slide under it in case of accident or a sudden stop. This could result of death, serious injury or property damage. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest to the door.

SB090R1-F

To Release the Seat Belt

Illustration of a person performing a back massage or pressure technique on a patient's leg (no text or symbols visible)

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B220A01FC-EAT

SEAT BELTS - Centre Rear Seat 3-Point System With Emergency Locking Retractor (Not all models)

1. Before fastening the rear seat centre belt, confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are latched together.

2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched, pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:11 AM22

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 23

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

Illustration of a person wearing a harness and belt, holding a yellow object (no text or symbols)

WARNING:

When using the rear seat centre belt, you must lock all metal tabs and buckles. If any metal tab or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) with the following exceptions.

(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down.
(2) If transporting an object on the rear seat may cause damage to the rear seat centre belt.
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) immediately after folding rear seatbacks up.

B220001A-EAT

To Release the Seat Belt

Interior view of a car seat with two passenger seatbelt straps (no text or symbols visible)

When you want to release the seat belt, press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:

The centre lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts or the centre lap belt, make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation.

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

24

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimise the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children should use one of the seat belts provided.

You are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle you must put them in a child restraint system (safety seat). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING:

o A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat.
Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus, only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.
o Since a safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.
When the child restraint system is not in use, fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should still sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride In the front passenger seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the outboard lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer to the centre of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the centre seat lap belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips and as snug as possible.
o If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, we recommend the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child.
o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 25

o Never use an infant carrier or child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident.

Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms whilst they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child In the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt.
o If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

B23DF01A-EAT

Installation on Rear Seat Centre Position

Two-panel illustration showing a baby in a car seatbelt and a child seated inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Use the centre seat belt for the rear to secure the child restraint system as illustrated. After installation of the child restraint system, rock the child seat back and forth, and side to side to ensure that it is properly secured by the seat belt.

If the child seat moves, readjust the length of the seat belt. Then, if equipped, insert the child restraint tether strap hook into the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Always refer to the child restraint system manufacturer's recommendation before installing the child restraint system in your vehicle.

B230G01A-GAT

Installation on Outboard Rear Seats

Side-by-side illustration of a car seatbelt and its passenger seatbelt, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

To install a child restraint system in the outboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt from its retractor. Install the child restraint system, buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child's head or neck. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

26

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.

NOTE:

o Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your Hyundai authorised repairer.

WARNING:

Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle.

B230H04A-GAT

Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat Position using the Seat Belt

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

Age Group	Seating Position
	Front Passenger	Rear Outboard	Rear Centre
0: Up to 10 kg(0 ~ 9 months)	X	U	X
0+: Up to 13 kg(0 ~ 2 years)	X	U	X
I: 9kg to 18kg(9 months - 4years)	X U, L	1 U
II & III: 15kg to36kg(4 ~ 12 years)	X	U	F

U F

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 27

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this group
L1: Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1" approved for use in this group (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this group

B23002A-GAT

Using a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System

Cover, Child Restraint Hook Holder (4 door only) Bolt, Holder (5/16"-30 mm) Washer, Conical Spring Holder, Child Restraint Hook Spacer (10 mm), Child Restraint Hook Holder Retainer Washer B230G21FC

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is strongly recommended. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further recommended that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided three child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.

B230E02FC-EAT

Securing a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are located on the vertical back panel (behind rear bumper bar).

To install the child restraint seat

1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

28

Covering shelf Tether strap hook Back panel Front of Vehicle B230E01FC

WARNING: To install the Child Restraint Seat, for safety reasons the Seat should be positioned rearmost with the seatback in a vertical position, not reclined.

B200C00FC-EAT

Using a Child Restraint System with "ISOFIX" System and "Tether Anchorage" System

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and side views (no text or symbols)

ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle.

This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

1. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint seat hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:11 AM28

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 29

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo / Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is approved according to the requirement ECE-R44. This seat has been tested extensively by Hyundai and is recommended for your Hyundai.

ISOFIX Anchor B230D02FC-1

On each side of the rear seat, between the cushion and backrest, are located a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting located in the luggage compartment. During the installation, the seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in such a way whereby you can hear it click (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-belt to the top tether mounting located in the luggage compartment. The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installation manual for the ISOFIX-seat, whilst using the ISOFIX-child-seat, the rear-bench not allowed to be moved beyond the middle position to the forward direction.

NOTE:

An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be installed if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-seat, which was bought for another car, ask your Hyundai authorised repairer whether this seat-type is approved and recommended for your Hyundai.

To secure the child restraint seat

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with yellow arrows indicating features, no visible text or symbols

1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

30

1. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Refer to "Securing a Child Restraint System with the Tether Anchorage System" on page 1-27.

WARNING:

Do not install a child restraint seat at the centre of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the centre of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death.

When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts.
Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. Over-loading may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death.
o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration.
o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

B180001A-EAT

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pretensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated with the airbags.

Illustration of a car interior showing two people seated, one standing and one sitting in the back seat, with directional arrows indicating airflow or traffic (no text or symbols)

The pre-tensioner seat belt operates in the same way as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) type of seat belt.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 31

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. However, in certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

Passenger's airbag Driver's airbag B180910-D

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration.

1.SRS airbag warning light
2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
3.SRS control module

WARNING:

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the correct position.

NOTE:

Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated with the airbags. The pretensioners will be activated under these conditions even if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision.
When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

32

CAUTION:

Because the sensor that activates the SRS airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warning light on the instrument panel will blink for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the "ON" position and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if the SRS system is not functioning. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or if it remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is being driven, please have an Hyundai authorised repairer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING:

o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.
Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an Hyundai authorised repairer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner.

Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.
o Always wear the seat belts when driving or travelling in a motor vehicle.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRA- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 33

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRA- INT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM

B240A02F-EAT

Driver's Airbag

HFC1073

Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the centre of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone, in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

NOTE:

Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the reverse side of the sun visor and in the glove box.

WARNING:

As its name implies, the SRS is designed to work with, and be supplemental to, the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times whilst the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to likely cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.
o The SRS is designed to deploy the airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30^ from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle and will not deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once. Thus, seat belts must be worn at all times.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

34

Rear impact Side Impact Rollover B240CD1FC o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, airbags will not normally deploy in frontal crashes below the de- ployment threshold speed. o For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag whilst the vehicle is in motion.

The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

B240B00A-DAT

SRS Components and Functions

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat with hands resting on the seat (no text or symbols)

The SRS consists of the following components:

• Driver's Airbag Module
• Passenger's Airbag Module
• SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
• SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elements whilst the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 35

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which the SRI should go out.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, holding a large object (no text or symbols present)

The airbag modules are located both in the centre of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a considerable impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the airbags.

Line drawing of a person sitting in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags.

A fully inflated airbag in combination with a properly worn seat belt slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, thus reducing the risk of head or chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility.

CAUTION: Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with passenger's side air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's side air bag inflates.

Passenger's Airbag B240804FC B240804FC

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

36

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster not on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

Passenger's Airbag B24060SL

WARNING:

When the SRS is activated, there may be a loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. Be sure to wash your hands and face thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed.
o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS SRI does not come on, or continuously remains on, after flashing for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or after the engine is started, or comes on whilst driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai authorised repairer.

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position or remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI to illuminate.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 37

B990B04Y-EAT Side Impact Airbag

Interior view of a car with a person sitting on the back, wearing a pillow (no visible text or symbols)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Interior view of a car showing the side airbag sensor and dashboard (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING: o The side impact airbag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times whilst the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

For best protection from the side airbag system and to avoid being injured is by the deploying side impact airbag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed in their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.
o Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
o Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag.
o Do not use excessive force on the side of the seat.
o Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

38

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact air bag inflates.
To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.

B240C0GY-EAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. The entire SRS system must be inspected by an Hyundai authorised repairer in 10 years after the date that the vehicle was manufactured.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING:

o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-ward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

If you must use a rear facing child seat on the front seat, first deactivate the air bag system and ensure that the passenger's front air bag 'off' indicator light in the instrument cluster is displayed.

o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position.

A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident.

o Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 39

For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate.
o If the airbags inflate, they must be replaced by an Hyundai authorised repairer.
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in Injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS Inoperative.

If components of the airbag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Your Hyundai authorised repairer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
o If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the new owner of these important points and make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start engine; have the car towed to Hyundai authorised repairer.
Do not replace the bumper or the bumper guard with the one other than the Hyundai genuine parts. Otherwise, it can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to unexpected injury.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR

B260A02FC-EAT PETROL ENGINE

1 2 3 4 5 6 x1000rpm 10 20 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 MPH km/h 0 140 11 7 8 9 10 ESP OFF P R N D 2 L ESP OD OFF IMP BRAKE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 AIR BAG

B260A02FC-D
fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM40

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 41

1. Temperature Gauge

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Digital Clock

5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (Not all models)

6. Fuel Gauge

7. Turn Signal Indicator Light

8. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light

(Auto T/A only)

1. Immobiliser Warning Indicator Light

2. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

3. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light

(Not all models)/Traction Control Indicator Light

(Not all models)

1. Overdrive off Indicator Light (Not all models)

2. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

3. Charging System Warning Light

4. Low Fuel Warning Light

5. High Beam Indicator Light

6. Tail Gate Open Warning Light

7. Door Open (Ajar) Warning Light

8. Oil Pressure Warning Light

9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

10. ABS Warning Light (Not all models)

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 42

B200B02FC-EAT DIESEL ENGINE

1 2 3 4 5 6 x1000rpm 1 2 3 4 5 6 MPH 120 140 80 60 40 20 0 km/h ESP OFF ESP BRAKE AIR BAG 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ABS

B260B02FC-D
fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM42

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 43

1. Temperature Gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Speedometer
4. Digital Clock
5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (Not all models)
6. Fuel Gauge
7. Fuel Filter Warning Light
8. Turn Signal Indicator Light
9. Immobiliser Warning Indicator Light
10. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
11. Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light

12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (Not all models)/Traction Control Indicator Light (Not all models)

13. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

14. Charging System Warning Light
15. Low Fuel Warning Light
16. High Beam Indicator Light
17. Tail Gate Open Warning Light
18. Door Open (Ajar) Warning Light
19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
20. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
21. ABS Warning Light (Not all models)

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

44

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

SB210G1-E

Turn Signal Indicator Light

Operation of a turn signal is indicated by the warning light located in the instrument cluster. If the light fails to illuminate or does not flash, a malfunction within the turn signal system is indicated.

B25DUDITB-EAT

Immobiliser Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on for some seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. At this time, you can start the engine. The light goes out after the engine is running. In case this light goes out before you start the engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" position and restart the engine. In case this light blinks for five seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON" position, this indicates that the immobiliser system is out of order.

SB210C1-E

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator Light

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes on and flashes for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly.

If the SRI does not come on, or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine, or if it comes on whilst driving, have the SRS inspected by an Hyundai authorised repairer.

B260C02E-EAT

Traction Control Indicator Light (Not all models)

The traction control indicator changes operation according to the ignition switch position and whether or not the system is in operation.

It will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and then go off in a few seconds. If the TCS indicator stays on, take your car to your Hyundai authorised repairer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS system.

B265001LZ-EAT

Electronic Stability Program Indicator Lights (Not all models)

The electronic stability program indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not.

They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFF indicator stays on, take your car to your Hyundai authorised repairer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the ESP.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 45

Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Not all models)

When the overdrive (4th gear) switch is turned off and the operation of overdrive (4th gear) is cancelled, the overdrive warning light (O/D OFF) will be illuminated. When the switch is at the on position, the gearbox will operate in the normal fully automatic mode and the warning light will be extinguished.

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

WARNING:

In the event of problems being suspected with the braking system, the advice of the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer must be sought before the vehicle is driven. Driving the vehicle with either an electrical or hydraulic braking system defect may be dangerous, resulting in accident or personal injury.

Warning light operation

The parking brake/low brake fluid level warning light will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position irrespective of whether or not the parking brake is applied and must be extinguished when the engine starts and the parking brake released. If the warning light fails to extinguish or illuminates at any other time, the vehicle must be brought to rest in a safe location and the level of brake fluid in the reservoir checked.

If the fluid level is incorrect, fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. If, after correcting the brake fluid level, the warning light continues to be illuminated, the advice of the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer must be sought before the vehicle is driven again.

The Hyundai Matrix is equipped with a diagonally split dual braking system which will ensure that in the event of one of the brake circuits becoming defective, approximately fifty per cent of the normal braking performance will be available.

If failure of one of the circuits occurs, the required amount of pedal effort, pedal travel and stopping distance will be increased. Use of the gearbox is recommended to assist in bringing the vehicle to rest. The vehicle must not be driven once brake failure has occurred until the system has been repaired and is functioning normally.

The braking system employs a vacuum servo in order that the pedal efforts are reduced. Power for the servo is derived from the engine and therefore, in the event of the engine stopping or the vehicle being towed, pedal efforts will be substantially increased.

45

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

46

SB210M1-E

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and should be extinguished when the engine is started. If the light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned "ON" or fails to extinguish after starting the engine, the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer should be contacted. If the light illuminates whilst the vehicle is being driven, stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and check the condition of the alternator drive belt. If the belt is in place and the tension is satisfactory, the advice of a Hyundai authorised repairer should be sought.

CAUTION:

If the drive belt (generator belt) is loose, broken, or missing whilst the vehicle is driving, there may be a serious malfunction, engine could overheat because this belt also drives the water pump.

SG210P1-E

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel warning light serves to warn the driver that the remaining fuel quantity is approximately 9 litres and that the vehicle should be refuelled. If the vehicle is driven for an extended period with the low fuel warning light illuminated there exists a possibility that misfiring due to fuel shortage may occur. This situation must be avoided to prevent damage to the catalyst occurring.

SB210J1-E

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light will illuminate whenever the headlights are switched to high beam of flash position.

B260B01FC-EAT

Hatchback Door Open Warning Light

The hatchback door open warning light indicates when hatchback door open is open or is not fully closed. Ensure that the light has extinguished prior to driving the vehicle.

Door Open (Ajar) Warning Light

The door ajar warning light indicates that a door is not correctly closed. Ensure that the light is extinguished prior to driving the vehicle.

SB210K1-E

Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:

If the oil pressure light illuminates when the engine is running, an insufficient oil pressure level for continued safe operation of the engine exists. Continued operation of the engine in this condition may result in serious engine damage.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 47

Under normal circumstances, the light will illuminate when the ignition is turned "on" and will be extinguished when the engine is started.

If the oil pressure warning light illuminates whilst the engine is running, stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level. If the level is insufficient, add the required amount of oil as indicated by the engine oil dipstick. If the light fails to extinguish when the engine is restarted, do not continue to operate the vehicle.

If the oil pressure light illuminates during normal operation and the cause is not an insufficient oil level, or the light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned "on", contact the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer before further operating the vehicle.

B280N02FC-EAT

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR CHECK Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component, and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. This light will illuminate when the ignition key is tuned to the "ON" position, and then it will go out after the engine start. If it illuminates whilst driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your nearest Hyundai authorised repairer and have the system checked.

B260P02Y-EAT

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (Not all models)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the Anti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on and then go off in a approximately seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on whilst driving, or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai authorised repairer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

CAUTION:

If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/ Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on whilst driving, there may be a problem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake Force Distribution). If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai authorised repairer as soon as possible.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

48

B265A01FC-EAT

Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Engine)

This light illuminates when the engine has started and goes off after a approximately seconds. If it lights up whilst the engine is running, it indicates that water has accumulated inside the fuel filter. If this happens, remove the water from the fuel filter. (Refer to "6-32 page")

B260S01B-GAT

Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel Engine)

The indicator light illuminates amber when the ignition switch is placed at the "ON" position. The engine can be started after the pre-heat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery condition.

NOTE:

If the engine were not started 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "ON" position, in order to preheat again.

B900A01A-EAT

ACOUSTIC WARNING SOUND (Not all models)

The acoustic warning chime sounds when the tail lights are on and the door in driver side is open. This prevents the battery from discharging when the car is left with the tail lights on. The chime sounds until the tail lights are turned off.

B2708020-EAT

PARKING START WARNING SOUND (Not all models)

If the vehicle is driven at 6mph(10km/h) for more than 2\~3 seconds, the warning chime will sound continuously when the parking brake engaged.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 49 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

SB210S1-E

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATOR

The front brake disc pads are fitted with an audible wear indicator which will cause a high pitched noise to be emitted when the remaining amount of friction lining is below the specified value. When the wear indicator is heard, the brake pads should be replaced without delay to avoid damage occurring to the brake discs and a severe reduction in braking efficiency.

SB215A1-E

FUEL GAUGE

F F HFC2015

The fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

S021601-E

Diagram of a magnifying glass with a curved tube and a submerged object, labeled HFC2101 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

B950A01E-EAT

REAR FOG AUDIBLE WARNING SOUND

The rear fog audible warning chime sounds when the rear fog lights are on and the door in driver side is open.

NOTE:

The fuel gauge is not intended to give other than an approximate indication of the fuel level and is unsuitable for the purposes of calculating fuel consumption figures.

The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature and will, under normal circumstances, give an indication in the "Normal" or centre portion of the scale. Should the indication move into the upper or "HOT" portion of the scale, engine overheating is indicated. Under these circumstances, the vehicle should be brought to rest as soon as is safe to do so and the engine turned off. Once the engine has cooled somewhat, the coolant level and the condition of the generator/water pump drive belt should be checked.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

50

If the cause of the overheating cannot be readily established, the assistance of a Hyundai authorised repairer should be sought.

WARNING:

The engine cooling system is pressurized and removal of the radiator cap when the engine is hot may cause hot water and steam to be ejected from the radiator resulting in burns and scalding. The radiator cap must only be removed when the engine has cooled. Do not add cold water to a hot engine to avoid the possibility of engine damage. The use of plain water in the cooling system is not recommended since the aluminium components of the cooling system require the use of a corrosion Inhibitor found in the recommended Ethylene Glycol type anti freeze solutions.

SB215C1-E

SPEEDOMETER

60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 560 580 600 MPH B3C0A01FC

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in both miles and kilometres per hour.

SB215F1-E

TACHOMETER

Petrol engine x1000rpm HFC2043

Diesel engine

x1000rpm B330AC1FC

The tachometer registers the speed of the engine in revolutions per minute (R.P.M.).

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 51

CAUTION:

The maximum safe engine operating speed is indicated by the red zone of the tachometer scale. The engine should not be operated beyond the beginning of this zone or serious engine damage may result.

B310801FC-EAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

Without Trip Computer ODD TRIP A B MILES 88888.8 Reset switch B310921FC

With Trip Computer 88:88 MPH 000 TRIP A B MILES Reset switch B310802FC

Function of digital odometer/ Trip odometer

Pushing in the reset switch when the ignition switch is turned "ON" will display the following sequence:

① CDO 123.4 ② TRIP A 34.7 ③ TRIP B 8.0 HFC2090

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distance in miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Any alteration of the odometer may void your warranty coverage.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

52

TRIP COMPUTER

2,3 Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles.

TRIP A: First distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination.

TRIP B: Second distance from the first destination to the final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the reset switch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset to 0.

B400G01FC-EAT

(Not all models)

8.0: 8.0 MPH 000 TRIP [A] B MILES 8.8888.8 Reset switch 6310002FC

The trip computer is the microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays information related to driving, such as distance to empty, average speed and drive time on the LCD.

Reset switch

o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-functional display mode.
o Pushing in the reset switch changes the display as follows;

graph TD
    A["DISTANCE TO EMPTY"] --> B["AVERAGE SPEED"]
    B --> C["DRIVE TIME"]
    C --> A

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 53

1. Distance to empty

Distance to empty symbol 300 Distance to empty (mile) HFC2052

o This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel in the fuel tank and distance to empty symbol.
o When refueling with more than 6.3 quarts, the trip computer will recognize refueling.
When the battery has been reinstalled after being discharged or disconnected, drive more than 20 miles for an accurate distance to empty.

NOTE:

o If the distance to empty is indicated "--", have the trip computer system checked by your Hyundai authorised repairer.
o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions.
o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving pattern or vehicle speed.

2. Average speed

Average speed symbol 123 MHP Average speed (mph) B40000FC

This mode indicates the average speed travelled since the last average speed reset.

o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero.

3. Drive time

Drive time symbol 8:0:0:0 Drive time HFC2054

o This mode indicates the drive time travelled since the last drive time reset.
o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the drive time is being displayed, clears the drive time to zero.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

54 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH

SB220A1-E

Turn Signal Operation

To signal an intention to turn right, the switch lever should be pressed down. To signal an intention to turn left, the switch lever should be pushed upwards. In both instances, the turn signal lights the instrument cluster warning light will flash. Upon completion of the manoeuvre, the lever will, under normal circumstances, return to the "OFF" position. However, if the manoeuvre involved only a small movement of the steering wheel, the signal may need to be cancelled manually. If either turn signal indicator flashes more rapidly than normal or refuses to flash at all, a malfunction of the turn signal system may exist.

SB220B1-E

Lane Change Signal

Illustration of a hand holding an electric plug with yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To indicate an intention to change lanes, moving the lever slightly towards the direction of the relevant turn signal will cause the turn signal lights to flash. When the lever is released, it will return to the "OFF" position.

B340C00FC-EAT

Lighting Switch

Hand holding a plug with yellow motion arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

The vehicle sidelights and headlights are operated by rotating the end of the turn signal switch barrel. To operate the parking lights, rotating the switch to the first detent with ignition switch at the "OFF" position will cause the lights to illuminate. To operate the headlights, the turn signal switch barrel should be rotated to the second detent. The headlights will only operate when the ignition switch is at the "ON" position. If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position, only the parking lights will function.

NOTE:

The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 WINDSCREEN WIPER/ 55

Sidelight auto cut (Not all models)

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the small light when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the sidelight will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the sidelights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

SB220C1-E

High And Low Beam

To turn on the headlight high beams, push the lever forward (away from you). For low beams, pull the lever back (toward you). The appropriate headlight beam indicator light will come on at the same time.

SB220E1-E

Headlight Flash

Illustration of a hand holding a glucose meter with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

The headlights may be flashed by pulling the turn signal switch lever towards the steering wheel. The headlights will be extinguished when the switch is released.

WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

SB200A1-E

(1) (2) (3)

The windscreen wiper switch, dependent upon model, has three operating positions.

1. Intermittent wiper operation (Not all models)
   2.Low speed operation
2. High speed operation

NOTE:

To prevent damage to the wiper system, do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice, operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

56

B3508020-EAT

Windscreen Washer Operation

Illustration of a hand holding a medical or laboratory device with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the device itself)

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel.

Type A

When the washer lever is operated, the wipers automatically make two passes across the windshield (If insatalled).

Type B

To wipe off the windshield washer, you will have to additionally activate the windshield wiper.

The washer continues to operate until the lever is released.

NOTE:

Do not operate the washer more than 15 seconds at a time or when the fluid reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in winter, use windscreen washer antifreeze.

Single Sweep Operation

Close-up of a medical or electronic device with a yellow arrow pointing upward and a label 'B950B02FC-D' at the bottom (no readable text on device body)

If a single wipe is desired, push the windscreen wiper and washer control lever upwards.

B350C02FC-DAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

Hand holding a handheld device with yellow circular arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the switch in this position, the interval between wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18 seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM HEATED REAR WINDOW 57

B350A010-EAT

Hatchback Door Wiper And Washer Switch

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with yellow circular arrows indicating rotation or signal flow (no text or symbols)

1. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper operates whilst the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position.
   2.OFF
2. INT : To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the rear window wiper barrel in the "INT" position.
   4.ON: When the point indicates "ON", the rear window wiper operates continuously.

SB240A1-E

Diagram of car dashboard with warning sign and control panel, showing vehicle status indicators

The hazard warning system should be used whenever it becomes necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. The hazard warning system is operated by depressing the switch at which time all turn signal lights will flash simultaneously and the turn signal warning lights located within the instrument cluster will flash simultaneously.
The hazard warning system may be turned off by depressing the switch again.

SB250A1-E

Diagram of car interior showing a mobile phone with a magnified view of the screen, labeled 'HFC2001-D'

To operate the heated rear window depress the switch shown. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after 20 minutes or when the ignition is turned off.

The system may be turned off manually by depressing the switch again.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

58

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the rear window defroster to operate.

CAUTION:

The inside of the rear windscreen should never be cleaned with a hard or sharp implement since damage to the heating element may occur. The glass should only be cleaned with a soft cloth or chamois leather with the use only of a mild detergent or proprietary glass cleaner where necessary. Only horizontal movement of the cloth should be made when cleaning the glass and care should be exercised to ensure that the heating elements are not damaged by rings or jewellery whilst the glass is being cleaned.

B980G01FC-EAT

Front Fog Light Switch (Not all models)

€0 B30GB01FC-D

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch in the "ON" position. They will come on when the headlight switch is in the first or second position.

B380AD1Y-GAT

Rear Fog Light Switch

B350A01FC-D

To turn on the rear fog lights, push the switch. They will come on when the headlight switch is in the second position and the key is in the "ON" position.

HEADLIGHTLEVELING DEVICE CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 DIGITAL CLOCK 59

HEADLIGHTLEVELINGDEVICE SYSTEM

B340G01FC-EAT B340G01FC-D

To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch. The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users. Listed below are the examples of recommended switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.

Loading Condition	Switch Position
Driver only	0
Driver + front passenger	0
Full passengers (including driver)	1
Full passengers (including driver) + Maximum permissible loading	2
Driver + Maximum permissible loading	3

B400A01A-AAT

18:88 H M R HFC2091

There are three control buttons for the digital clock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated.

MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.

RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10:30 and 11:29 changes the readout to 11:00.

Pressing "R" between 11:30 and 12:29 changes the readout to 12:00.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

60

POWER OUTLETCIGAR LIGHTER

SB290A02-F

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with two compartments and a central knob (no text or symbols visible)

For the cigar lighter to work, the key must be in the "ACC" or the "ON" position. To use the cigar lighter, push the lighter all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out into the "ready" position. Do not hold the cigar lighter at the depressed position which may result in damage to the vehicle wiring or an electrical fire. If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai replacement part.

BS00D01FC-EAT
(Not all models)

Technical illustration of a vehicle engine compartment showing internal components and exterior view (no text or symbols)

These supply 12V electric power to operate electric accessories or equipment only when the key is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION:

Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using when the engine stops or keeping the electric device with plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to discharge.
Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12 volts.
Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Do not use electric accessories or equipment other than the Hyundai genuine parts in the socket.

ASHTRAY DRINK HOLDER 61 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

B430A01FC-GAT

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the handle and vent, with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The front ashtray may be opened by pulling it up by its top edge. To remove the ashtray to empty or clean it, pull the cover up all the way out. The ashtray light will only illuminate when the external lights are on.

DRINK HOLDER

B450A02FC-EAT
Front Drink Holder (Not all models)

Driver's Passenger's

HFC2097-D
The front drink holder is used for holding cups.
To use the passenger's drink holder, push the drink holder and pull it entirely.

B450B02FC-EAT
Rear Drink Holder (Not all models)

Two views of a food waste bin with a yellow arrow indicating a waste symbol (no text or labels present)

The rear drink holder is located on the rear main console for holding cups.
The rear drink holder can be used by pushing the knob on the rear main console downward and then releasing it.

CAUTION:

Place the drink holder in its original position whilst not in use.

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

62

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage Interior trim and electrical components.
Do not place objects other than cups or drinks in the drink holder. Such objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

SB00A2-E

3D mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a cylindrical part (no visible text or symbols)

The parking brake must always be set when the vehicle is to be left unattended. When the parking brake is applied, and the ignition key is at the "ON" position, the parking brake warning lamp will be illuminated. Before driving the vehicle, the parking brake must be fully released and the warning lamp extinguished.

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible.

In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transmission vehicles or in the Park position on automatic transmission vehicles.

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly, depress the release button and lower the parking brake lever whilst holding the button.

REAR SEAT ARM REST SUNROOF 63 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

B611A02FC-EAT (Not all models)

Interior view of a car seat with two seats and one seatbelt, showing no text or symbols

This arm rest is located in the centre of the rear seat back with box.

The drink holder in the box can be used by opening the lid of the arm rest.

WARNING:

Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. Such objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
o Be careful not to injure your fingers when you open the lid of the arm rest.

SG30A3-E (Not all models)

Interior view of a car showing dashboard, air vent, and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

The electrically operated sunroof may be used only whilst the ignition switch is at the "ON" position. The sunroof is equipped with a sunshade which may be used whilst the sunroof is at the closed position to obscure incoming light.

The sunshade is automatically opened whenever the sunroof is opened but must be manually closed by sliding forward after the sunroof is closed. When the sunroof is opened, the wind deflector will automatically rise to the upper position and will automatically retract when the sunroof is closed.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting a device with 'HFC2021' label.

To open the sunroof, depress and hold the button indicated. The button should be released when the sunroof is at the fully open position. The sunroof may be closed by depressing and holding the button indicated. The button should be released when the sunroof is at the fully closed position.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

64

CAUTION:

Do not open the sunroof in severely cold temperature or when it is covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails.
Do not press any sunroof control button longer than necessary. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

WARNING:

Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands, arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as this could result in injury.
Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time.

SB300C1-E

Tilting the Sunroof System

HFC2022

The sunroof can be tilted and closed by depressing the button indicated. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the up position.

NOTE:

The sunroof should not be opened when water or standing rain is on the roof panel. Driving the vehicle for a short distance will allow the water to disperse naturally at which point the sunroof may be opened.

B480001FC-EAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof
If the sunroof fails to operate:

Hand using a tool to adjust or install a vehicle interior panel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior light lenses in the front overhead console.
   

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow directional arrow and label HFC1037 (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

INTERIOR LIGHT 65 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

1. Turn the hexagonal bolts with a socket wrench counterclockwise to remove the front overhead console.
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's luggage room or glove box.

Interior view of a car intake section showing internal compartments and a yellow warning symbol (no text or labels)

1. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close.

B480A01E-EAT

Map Light

With Sunroof Without Sunroof HFC480

The two map lights are located at each side of the interior light.

The lights may be operated by depressing the switch to turn on the light and pressing again to turn off the light. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map light at night or as a personal light for the driver or the passenger.

SB340B3-E

Interior Light

With Sunroof Without Sunroof HFC490

The interior courtesy light has a button of three positions.

The three positions are:

o DR

In the "DR" position, the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes out when the door is closed.

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all times.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

66

SPECTACLE CASE

NOTE:

Ensure the light is turned to the "OFF" position after use. Leaving in the on position for prolonged periods will discharge the battery.

CAUTION:

Do not leave the switch in this position for an extended period time when the vehicle is not running.

o OFF

In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all times even though a door is open.

B491A02FC-EAT

(Not all models)

Two grayscale diagrams showing a device with a yellow arrow pointing to a gray panel, no text or symbols present.

The spectacle case is located on the front overhead console. Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle case.

WARNING:

Do not open the spectacle case whilst the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open spectacle case.

MULTI BOX

B500B02E-GAT

Diagram showing a car interior with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no text or symbols present

The multi box may be opened by pulling it out by its grip.

It is used for storing small commodities.

If the multi box is removed, the fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be exposed.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM66

ACCESSORY TRAY GLOVE BOX MIRROR CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 67

B820A01FC-GAT

Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and control panels (no visible text or symbols)

The accessory tray may be opened by pushing the knob sidewards and releasing slowly it.
It is used for storing small commodities.

B500A01A-EAT

Interior view of a car dashboard with a yellow control panel and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury, the glove box lid must be kept closed whilst the vehicle is in motion.

o To open the glove box, pull the glove box release lever.

B510B01FC-EAT
EXTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR Electric Type

Close-up of a white electronic device control panel with buttons and a handle (no visible text or symbols)

The outside rear view mirror can be adjusted in any direction to give the maximum rear view vision.
The remote control outside rear view mirror switch controls the adjustments for passenger side door mirror.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the "L" (or "R") position to activate the adjustable mechanism for the adjusting door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appropriate directional switch as illustrated.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

68

Circular mechanical component with yellow directional arrows and 'L' and 'R' labels (no readable text or symbols beyond basic markings)

CAUTION:

o Do not leave the switch on for an unnecessary length of time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face could cause permanent damage. To remove any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or approved delcer.

WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface, any objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear.

B510001HP-EAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER (Not all models)

HFC2050

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in the switch for the rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

SE380C1-F

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS

Diagram of a car's side mirror and steering wheel, showing yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push them towards the rear. The outside rear view mirrors can be folded rearward for parking in restricted areas.

WARNING:

Do not adjust or fold the outside rear view mirrors whilst the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury or property damage.

SUN VISOR 69 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

S0370A1-E
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR

3D illustration of a car rearview mirror with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

The interior mirror is of the day/night type to enable the glare of headlights from following vehicles to be eliminated during night time driving.

The tab located at the bottom of the mirror should be set to the position nearest the windscreen for normal day time driving, and flipped towards the rear of the vehicle to eliminate glare during night time driving. To adjust the field of vision, the mirror may be moved by hand upon the mounting.

0500A01E-EAT

Vanity mirror HFC20M-D

Sun visors are fitted to both the driver and passenger side of the vehicle. Certain derivatives are equipped with a vanity mirror which is located on the back of the driver and passenger visor. The visor may be lowered to reduce the amount of glare from directly ahead, or may be moved towards the side window to reduce glare from the side of the vehicle, once the inner pivot has been unclipped from the bracket.

NOTE:

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) label containing useful information can be found on the back of each sun visor.

WARNING:

Do not place the sun visor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or other objects.

NOTE:

The mirror should always be adjusted prior to setting the vehicle in motion.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

70

FOLD-UP TRAY

B810A01FC-GAT

Illustration of a kitchen appliance with a tray and handle, showing a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols)

For your convenience, it may be used as a table holding a book, cup or can.

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-EAT

Side view of a silver SUV with a roof-mounted roof, viewed from the side (no visible text or symbols)

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the high mounted rear stoplight in the centre of the rear window or inserted in the rear spoiler also lights when the brakes are applied.

BONNET RELEASE

B570A01FC-EAT

Interior view of a car showing the door panel and a yellow directional arrow icon (no text or symbols)

Pull the release lever inside the vehicle to unlatch the bonnet. At the front of the vehicle, push the safety catch lever sidewards as shown and raise the bonnet by hand. Support the bonnet by means of the bonnet prop.

Before closing the bonnet, ensure that the prop is correctly stowed. Lower the bonnet by hand to a position of approximately 30cm from the closed position and allow the bonnet to drop. Do not attempt to close the bonnet by lowering the panel to the closed position and pressing upon the panel work since this may result in damage to the panel.

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the fold-up tray should be place its original position whilst the vehicle is moving.

REMOTE FUEL FILLER FLAP 71 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

Illustration of a car with a person on its side and a magnified inset showing a person in motion (no text or symbols)

REMOTE FUEL FILLER FLAP RELEASE
SB440A2-E (Not all models)

Illustration of a car with a highlighted electrical plug and switch, no text or symbols present

3D diagram of a device showing internal components and a sphere, no text or symbols present

CAUTION:

Ensure that the bonnet prop has been removed prior to closing the bonnet. Always check to ensure that the bonnet has latched prior to setting the vehicle in motion.

The fuel filler flap may be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up on the fuel filler flap release.

NOTE:

If the fuel filler flap will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on it to break the ice and release it. Do not lever the flap. If necessary, spray around the flap with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING:

o Petrol vapors are dangerous. Before refueling, always stop the engine and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler area. If you need to replace the filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part.

If you open the fuel filler cap during high ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern.

Whenever you open the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM71

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

72

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully.
Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel filler cap, have one's hands in contact with metal parts away from the filler neck to discharge static electricity.
Do not get back in the vehicle whilst refueling. Do not operate anything that can produce static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in explosion.
When using a portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground whilst refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Whilst starting refueling contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

Do not use cellular phones around a gas station. The electric current or electronic interference from cellular phones can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
When refueling always shut the engine off. Sparks by electrical equipment of the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. After refueling, check to make sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed, and then start the engine.
o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes around a gas station. Automotive fuels are flammable.

HATCHBACK DOOR

B540A01FC-EAT

UNLOCK LOCK GS40A02FC

WARNING:

The hatchback door should always be kept completely closed whilst the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car resulting in serious illness or death to the occupants. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.

LUGGAGE NET 73 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

o The hatchback door can be locked or unlocked with a key.
o The hatchback door is opened by pulling the outside handle up, raising the hatchback door manually.
To close, lower the hatchback door, then press down on it until it is closed. To be sure the hatchback door is fully closed, always try to pull it up again without using the outside handle.

B540D03FC-DAT

Technical illustration of two car seat compartments with no visible text or symbols

Some objects can be kept in the net in the luggage compartment.

Use the luggage net on the floor or at the back of the luggage compartment to prevent the objects from sliding.

WARNING:

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path. DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM73

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

74

CARGO AREA COVER

D850A01FC-EAT

Illustration of a car with open trunk and attached battery, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Nothing should be carried on top of the luggage cover. Loose materials could result in injury to vehicle occupants during sudden braking.

ROOF RACK

B630A03FC-EAT

(Not all models)

Side view of a car with front and rear panels, no visible text or symbols

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails and fixing components to adapt the roof rack on your vehicle may be obtained from an Hyundai authorised repairer.

CAUTION:

o The following specifications are recommended when loading cargo or luggage.

ROOF RACK

34 kg (75 lb)

EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

o Loading cargo or luggage above 34 kg (75 lb) on the roof rack may damage your vehicle. When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
To use the roof rails as a roof rack, you must fit the roof rails with two or more crossrails or equivalent before carrying cargo or luggage on the roof.
o When crossrail is adapted, you can load items on the roof rack.
o Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may damage stability of your vehicle.
o In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM74

AUTO FUEL CUT SWITCH STEERING WHEEL TILTLEVER HORN 75 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

B580B010-GAT (Petrol Engine)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a yellow component (no visible text or symbols)

The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. In the event of a collision or sudden impact, the auto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If this device is activated, it must be reset by pressing in on the top of the switch before the engine can be restarted.

SBS20A1-F

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

To adjust the steering wheel:

B610A01S-EAT

Circular diagram of a steering wheel with a yellow warning triangle on the steering wheel, labeled 'With Airbag' (no other text or symbols)

Press the pad of the steering wheel to sound the horn.

WARNING:

Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch, the fuel line should be checked for fuel leaks.

1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever by pulling it upward

WARNING:

Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel whilst driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle and result in death or serious injury.

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01Y-EAT (Not all models)

1. Side Ventilator 2. Side Defrost Nozzle 3. Centre Ventilator 4. Windscreen Defrost Nozz HFC

HFC002-D

1. Side Ventilator
2. Side Defrost Nozzle
3. Centre Ventilator
4. Windscreen Defrost Nozzle

B710B01A-DAT

CENTRE VENTILATOR

The centre ventilators are located in the middle of the dashboard.

To change the direction of the air flow, turn the control knob on the middle of the ventilator as desired.

B710C01FC-EAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side of the dashboard. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the centre of the vent. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to "≡" position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to

"☒". Keep these vents clear of any obstructions.

HEATING AND VENTILATION CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 77

B670A01FC-EAT

Rotary Type (Not all models)

1 2 3 4 B670A01FC

This model has four controls for the heating and cooling system. They are:

1. Temperature control
2. Fan speed control
3. Air flow control
4. Air intake control

B670E01A-AAT

Temperature Control

Circular mechanical component with central label 'A/C', no visible text or symbols beyond the label and number HFC2066

This is used to turn the heating system on and off and to select the degree of heating desired.

B670B01FC-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

Circular mechanical knob with numbered slots (0–4) and a central hub, no visible text or symbols beyond the number and label.

This is used to turn the blower fan on or off and to select the fan speed.

This blower fan speed, and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" positions.

"1" is lowest and "4" is the highest fan speed.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

78

B670006A-EAT

Air Flow Control

Circular industrial control knob with directional arrows and a central component (no text or symbols)

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windscreen. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:12 AM78

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 79

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Floor-Level Air is discharged through the floor vents.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard, showing airflow indicators (no text or symbols)

Floor-Defrost Level Air is discharged through the windscreen defrost vents and the floor vents. If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and infotainment lights (no text or symbols visible)

Defrost-Level Air is discharged through the windscreen defrost vents. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:13 AM79

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80

B670C02FC-EAT Air Intake Control

Circular industrial control knob with yellow indicator lights and control buttons (no text or symbols)

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.

FRESH MODE (a): The indicator light on the button goes off when the air intake control is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE (☐): The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in "Recirculation" mode will increase fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to ( ) mode (regardless of switch position). This is normal operation.

HEATING CONTROLS
B890A02S-AAT

A/C 0 1 2 3 4 N V S B600AD2FC

For normal heating operation, set the air intake control to the "Fresh" position and the air flow control to "Floor".

For faster heating, the air intake control should be in the "Recirculation" position.

If the windows fog up, move the air flow control to the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperature control to "Warm".

BI-LEVEL HEATING DEFROSTING/DEFLOWING CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 81

B700A01S-AAT

Three circular industrial control knob designs with no visible text or symbols

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating controls. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode (
o Set the air flow control at the "Bi-Level" position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm".

B710A01S-AAT

Three circular industrial control knob designs with no visible text or symbols

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode (☐).
To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents, set the airflow control to "Face" (7).
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm".

B720A02FC-EAT

Three circular industrial control knob designs with yellow curved arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windscreen:

To remove interior fog on the windscreen;

o Set the air flow control to the defrost (⊕) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

82

Diagram showing three circular switches with labeled terminals and directional arrows indicating rotation or adjustment.

To remove the frost or exterior fog on the windscreen;

o Set the air flow control to the defrost (☑) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to warm. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:

When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level (or defrost level () , it may cause fog to form on the exterior windscreen. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position (-) and fan speed control to the low position.

B730A01L-EAT

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control at "Recirculation". Be sure to return the control to "Fresh" when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windscreen. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the windscreen, set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position, and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust temperature control to desired temperature.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-EAT

Air Conditioning Switch (Not all models)

Circular mechanical component with central yellow triangle labeled 'A/C', no visible text or symbols beyond the label and number HFC2069 (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)

The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 83

B740801FC-GAT

Air Conditioning Operation Cooling

Three circular industrial control knob designs with yellow arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing in on the switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode ()
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the "Recirculation" position on the air intake control.

B740C01FC-GAT

Dehumidified Heating

AC 0 1 2 3 4 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z BA BDCBFC

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode (💡).
o Set the air flow control to the desired position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

84

B740001A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you first get in, open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air condition-ing system, keep all windows closed to keep hot air out.
When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear. This increases engine speed, which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning off to avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.
During winter months or in periods when the air conditioning is not used regularly, run the air conditioning once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition.

AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM 85 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1

B970A01FC-EAT (Not all models)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

TYPE A (Without Air Quality System)

1 2 3 AUTO 88.8°C OUTSIDE -488 E MODE A/D 5 6 7 9 OFF 10

HFC224-3

B970B01FC-EAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control
2. Display Window
3. Blower Fan Control
4. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch
5. Air Flow Control Switch
6. Air Conditioning Switch
7. Air Intake Control Switch
8. Air Quality System Switch (Not all models)
9. Defroster Switch
   10.OFF Switch

TYPE B (With Air Quality System)

1 2 3 AUTO AUTO 88.8°C outfice -168.0°C MODE AVC 5 6 7 8 9 10 OFF HI

HFC224-2

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

86

B970C01NF-EAT

Automatic Operation

TEMP PUSH- AUTO HFC227

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls the heating and cooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and air conditioner will be controlled automatically.

TEMP PUSH AUTO HFC229

1. Turn the "TEMP" knob to set the desired temperature.

The temperature will increase to the maximum 90^ F( 32^ C) by turning the knob clockwise.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum 62^(17^) by turning the knob counterclockwise.

NOTE:

o If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode will reset to Centigrade degree.

This is a normal condition and you can adjust the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;

Press the "OFF" and "AUTO" button simultaneously for 3 seconds. The display shows that the unit of temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit. (°C → °F or °F → °C)

Photo Sensor B970C01FC-D

o Never place anything covering the photo sensor which is located in the car on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 87

B900A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well as by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected.

The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically.

Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to automatic control of the system.

B980G01NF-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

LOW HIGH PUSH OFF LO HI HFC225

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the appropriate fan speed control knob. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

B870002Y-EAT

Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.Q.S)

AUTO 600st 600st HFC240

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation inside air.

To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.

FRESH MODE ( ): The indicator light on the button comes on when the air intake control is fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE (☐): The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is recirculation mode.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

88

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, and air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to "mode (regardless of switch position). This is normal operation. The air intake control operates in "AUTO" mode when turning the ignition to the ON position if the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine.

B90004Y-EAT

Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S) (Not all models)

HFC240-1

This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air automatically.

— :OFF

- : ON

A

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 89

Recirculation mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside. But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the outside, the exhaust gas cut-off mode ( ) is automatically converted to the ( ) mode, to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in recirculation mode ( ) will give rise to misting of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculation mode ( ) selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.

CAUTION:

If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air intake control to the Fresh air position or A.Q.S control to "OFF".

B900D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

HFC259

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

90

B960E01FC-EAT

Air Flow Control

AUTO 80.5V HFC230

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windscreen. Four symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost position.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face-Level", the indicator light will come on, causing air to be discharged through the face level vents.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:13 AM90

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 91

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and infotainment (no visible text or symbols)

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents, windscreen defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no text or symbols visible)

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windscreen defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator.

B900F02E-EAT Defrost Switch

HFC241 88pt

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "☐" mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 38.3°F (3.5°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 38.3°F (3.5°C).

⊕

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

92

POLLEN FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)
B760A04FC-EAT

Outside air Inside air Filter Blower fan Evaporator core Heater core B750A01E

The pollen filter is located in front of the blower unit behind the glove box. It operates to decrease pollutants entering the car and to filter the air. To replace the pollen filter, refer to page 6-25.

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles or once a year. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent air filter inspections and changes are required.
o When the air flow rate is suddenly decreased, it must be checked at an Hyundai authorised repairer.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

FM reception Ionosphere

B750401L

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures high quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle is not strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges and other large obstructions in the area.

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 93

AM reception Ionosphere B750ACGL

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequency. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station Mountains Unobstructed area ? Buildings Iron bridges Obstructed area B750403L

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequency and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

B750A04L

o Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station. o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

94

Diagram showing a car connected to multiple power transmission towers, no text or symbols present

o Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and a reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

B750803Y-EAT Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

CAUTION:

When using a communication system such as a mobile phone or a radio inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a mobile phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING:

Don't use a cellular phone whilst you are driving.

ANTENNA CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1 95

B070D01FC-GAT Roof Antenna

Side view of a silver car with a yellow sensor device attached to the roof, showing no text or symbols on the vehicle itself.

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise.

CAUTION:

o Be sure to remove the antenna before washing the car in an automatic car wash or it may be damaged.
o Before entering a place with a low height clearance, be sure to adjust the roof antenna low.
o When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened to ensure proper reception.

Side view of a silver car with a yellow tool inserted, showing the engine compartment (no text or symbols visible)

fcuk-1.p65 12/27/2006, 10:13 AM95

95

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Before Starting the Engine 2-3

Key Positions.... 2-4

Starting 2-5

Manual Transaxle 2-8

Automatic Transaxle 2-10

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 2-14

Brake Traction Control System (BTCS) 2-14

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)....2-16

Driving for Economy 2-18

Smooth Cornering 2-19

Winter Motoring....2-19

Trailer and Caravan Towing 2-21

2

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

SC020A1-E

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment, move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.

o Never inhale exhaust gas

Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Exhaust System Maintenance

Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.

o Confined Areas

Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.

o Prolonged Idling

If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the "Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.

o Load Carrying

If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the boot lid to be fully closed, the side windows must remain closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.

To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by snow leaves etc..

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A010-EAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are no flat tyres, puddles of oil or water or other indications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car check to be sure the parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.
4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors are clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and headrestraint to be sure they are in their proper positions.
6. Close all doors.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all other occupants have fastened theirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not needed.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON" check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

WARNING (DIESEL ENGINE):

To ensure that sufficient vacuum exists within the brake system during cold weather start-up conditions, it is necessary to run the engine at idle for several seconds after starting the engine.

WARNING:

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if installed).

TO START THE ENGINE

3

SC040A1-F

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH AND STEERING LOCK

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle, place the shift lever in "P" (park).
To start the engine, insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. Release it as soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:

For safety, the engine will not start if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position (automatic transaxle).

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4

KEY POSITIONS

SC050A2-E

WARNING:

The engine must never be turned off and the key removed from the ignition key cylinder whilst the vehicle is in motion since the steering lock will operate and control of the vehicle will be lost.

LOCK ACC ON START TGH C040401E

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key.

NOTE:

Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is at the "ON" position, the ignition and all accessories are available for use.

If the engine is not running, the key should not be left at this position since the battery will become discharged and damage to the ignition system may also result. For information regarding engine starting, refer to "STARTING THE ENGINE".

o "ACC"

When the ignition key is at the "ACC" position, the radio and other accessories may be used.

o "LOCK"

The ignition key may only be inserted or removed at this position.

SB060B1-E

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

When the key is removed, the steering column lock will be activated and will engage when the steering wheel is turned to the appropriate position. It is not necessary to turn the wheel until locked each time the key is removed since in the event of any unauthorised attempt at removal, the lock will become effective as soon as the steering wheel is turned. To unlock the steering, insert the key and turn to the "ACC" position. If the steering is locked, it may be necessary to rock the steering wheel slightly to facilitate turning the key. Under no circumstances should the key be forced since breakage of the key will occur.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 STARTING 5

SC090D1-F To Remove the Ignition Key

ACC LOCK ON START C070001E

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position.

SC080A1-E Starting The Petrol Engine

C060A01E +30V +20V +10V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +5V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +3V +1V +4V +2V +3V +2V +3V +2V +3V +1V +4V +3V +2V +3V +2V +3V +1V

1. Ensure that the transaxle is in neutral and that the clutch pedal is held depressed (manual transaxle) or the transaxle selector is at the "P" position (automatic transaxle vehicle).
2. Turn the ignition key to and hold at the "Start" position until the engine starts. When the engine has started, release the key.

NOTE:

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds continuously or continue to operate the starter after the engine has started to avoid damaging the starter motor. If the engine makes a false start, allow it and the starter motor to come to rest before attempting to start the engine again. Never attempt to start the engine with the transaxle in gear.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal whilst starting the engine. Allow the engine to idle for 20 seconds or so before driving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Do not leave the vehicle unattended whilst idling. Never allow the vehicle to idle or warm up in a confined space (ie garage) longer than is necessary to move the vehicle into an open area.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6

C051A01O-EAT

Starting The Diesel Engine

ENGINE COLD

o Turn the ignition key to position "ON" and wait for the pre-heat indicator light to go out.

o Operate the starter until the engine runs.

ENGINE WARM

Operate the starter. If the engine does not respond on the first attempt, wait several seconds and try again using the pre-heat.

1. After turning the ignition key to the "ON" position, make certain all warning lights and gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine.
2. On vehicles equipped with the diesel preheat indicator light, turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. The diesel pre-heat indicator light will first illuminate in amber, and then after a short time, the amber illumination will goes off, indicating that preheating is completed.

Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF

C050B01HP

NOTE:

If the engine does not start 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "ON" position, in order to preheat again.

WARNING:

Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed when starting a manual transaxle vehicle. This will prevent sudden movement should the vehicle be started in gear without the clutch depressed. Otherwise there is the potential to cause damage to the vehicle or injury to a person inside or outside of the vehicle as a result of this sudden vehicle movement.

1. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position and release it when the engine starts.

CD50B03S-EAT

NORMAL CONDITIONS

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park) position.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

7

C055B01B-GAT

STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER INTERCOOLER (DIESEL ENGINE)

(1) Do not race the engine or suddenly accelerate the engine immediately after starting it. If the engine is cold, allow the engine to idle for several seconds before it is driven to ensure sufficient lubrication of the turbo charger unit.
(2) After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load, the engine should be allowed to idle about 1 minute before turning it off. This idle time will allow the turbo charger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

SC060B1-E

FUEL ECONOMY

The following suggestions are made to assist in achieving the greatest degree of fuel economy.

o Maintaining a constant check on fuel consumption will enable the most economical use pattern and driving style to be adopted.
o Avoid using the vehicle for very short journeys if possible, particularly when a cold start is involved.
o Ensure that tyre pressures are maintained at the correct level.
o Use only the recommended grade of fuel.
o Avoid carrying unnecessary weight, and if a roof rack is in use, remove it as soon as possible after use.
o Anticipate the road and conditions ahead to enable adjustments in speed to be made smoothly. Avoid heavy acceleration and sharp braking.
o Avoid cruising at unnecessary high speeds.

o Always ensure that the periodic maintenance services are performed by a Hyundai authorised repairer at the time and/or mileage intervals specified.
o Use the air conditioning only when necessary.

WARNING:

Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbo charger unit.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 8 MANUAL TRANSAXLE

SC090A04-E

Mechanical component diagram with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

The five speed fully synchronized transaxle is controlled by a floor mounted shift lever upon which the shift pattern is indicated. It is important that when changing gear, the clutch pedal is fully depressed to avoid transaxle damage.

CAUTION:

o Do not attempt to engage reverse gear when the car is in motion.
To avoid damaging the selector mechanism, do not use the gear shift lever as a hand rest. Release the lever immediately the shift is completed.
To avoid premature clutch wear, do not use the clutch pedal as a foot rest, and do not hold the vehicle on a gradient using the clutch.
o Ensure that the engine is not over-revved by upshifting before the tachometer needle enters the red zone.
o Do not coast with the shift lever at the neutral position.
When descending long gradients, make use of the engine braking to assist the footbrake to avoid brake fade or over-heating.

When slippery conditions are encountered, increased caution should be exercised when gear changing, braking or accelerating. Abrupt changes in speed may cause a loss of traction or control of the vehicle.
During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
If you 've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1^st or R(Reverse), put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1^st or R(Reverse) gear position.
Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 9

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.

SC090B1-F

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driving.
This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.
Use the parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

C070E04A-EAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

Shift from-to	Recommended mph (km/h)
1-2	15 (20)
2-3	25 (40)
3-4	35 (55)
4-5	45 (75)

The shift points as shown above are recommended for optimum fuel economy and performance.

NOTE:

The shift points are recommended and should only be used in the appropriate driving conditions.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01A-GAT

PRND2L C080A01FC-D

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four forward speeds and one reverse speed. It has a conventional shift pattern as shown in the illustration. At night, with the first position of the multi-function switch, the appropriate symbol on the shift pattern indicator will be illuminated according to the range selected.

CAUTION:

Never shift into "R" or "P" position whilst the vehicle is moving.

NOTE:

Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. Push the button when shifting. The selector lever can be shifted freely.

For optimum fuel economy, accelerate gradually. The transaxle will automatically shift to the second, third and overdrive gears.

YC090A1-E

Selector Positions

o P (Park):

With the selector in this position, no drive is transmitted from the engine and the transaxle output and therefore the front wheels locked. The engine may be started with the selector in this position.

CAUTION:

The selector must NEVER be shifted to the "P" position whilst the vehicle is in motion, otherwise serious transaxle damage will result.

DC110C1-E

o R (Reverse):

With the selector in this position, reverse gear will be engaged. The engine may not be started with the selector in this position.

CAUTION:

The selector must NEVER be shifted to the "R" position whilst the vehicle is in motion.

DC110D1-E

o N (Neutral):

With the selector in this position, no gear is selected and no drive is transmitted from the engine. The engine may be started with the selector in this position.

CAUTION:

Do not coast with the selector at the "N" position.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 11

DC110E1-E

o D (Drive):

With the selector in this position, first gear will be engaged from rest and the transmission will automatically upshift to second, third and fourth depending upon the vehicle speed, throttle position and the position of the overdrive switch. The engine may not be started with the selector in this position.

DC110F1-E

o 2 (Second Gear):

With the selector in this position, first gear will be engaged from rest. The transmission will upshift to second gear depending upon the vehicle speed and throttle position. No upshift to third or fourth will occur. The engine may not be started with the selector in this position.

CAUTION:

Do not move the selector to the 2 position when the vehicle speed is in excess of 60 m.p.h.

DC110G2-E

o L (Low Gear):

With the selector in this position, first gear will be engaged from rest. No upshift will occur regardless of vehicle speed and throttle opening. The engine may not be started with the selector in this position.

CAUTION:

Do not move the selector to the "L" position when the vehicle speed is in excess of 50 m.p.h.

C090H01A-EAT

NOTE:

o The brake pedal should be depressed when shifting from NEU-TRAL to a forward or reverse gear.
o The brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" position.

C09002A-EAT

CAUTION:

o Shift into "R" and "P" only when the vehicle has completely stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R", "D", "2" or "L" position.
Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended whilst the engine is running.
o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary. See the maintenance schedule for the proper fluid recommendation.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12

SC130A1-E

Overdrive Switch

Mechanical gear shift lever with a yellow arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols visible)

The overdrive switch prevents the transaxle upshifting higher than third gear when the switch is turned "OFF". The transaxle will start from rest in first gear and upshift to second and third gear depending upon the roadspeed and throttle opening but will not upshift to fourth gear. When the overdrive switch is turned "ON", the transaxle will start from rest in first gear and will upshift, depending upon roadspeed and throttle opening to second, third and fourth gear. Therefore, when the overdrive switch is turned "OFF", the transaxle performs as a three speed unit and the overdrive warning light located in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.

When the overdrive switch is turned "ON", the transaxle functions as a fully automatic four speed unit with the maximum fuel economy potential of the vehicle being realized.

FC120D3-E

General Operating Instructions

o The button in the selector handle must be depressed before the selector can be moved.
o The engine may only be started when the selector is at position "P" or "N".
o Ensure that the footbrake is firmly applied when shifting from "P" or "N" to "D", "2", "L" or "R" and vice versa.
o Always engage the parking brake when the vehicle is unattended, never use the "P" position in place of the parking brake.
Under normal circumstances, the selector should be placed in the "D" position and the transaxle allowed to select the most ideal ratio for the circumstances. In this position maximum fuel economy will be achieved.

When descending steep gradients where engine braking is required, the selector should be placed at the "2" or "L" position depending upon the vehicle speed.
When climbing steep gradients using large throttle openings, the transaxle may repeatedly change between two adjacent ratios. This is a normal characteristic and may be prevented by cancelling the overdrive facility if the shifting occurs between third and fourth ratios, selecting position "2" if the shifting occurs between third and second ratios or selecting position "1" if the shifting occurs between first and second ratios.
o Never move the selector to or from the "P" or "N" position with the accelerator depressed.
o Ensure that the overdrive switch is at the "ON" position for maximum economy.
o If rapid acceleration is required, fully depress the accelerator pedal. In this condition, the kickdown mechanism will be operated and the transaxle will automatically downshift according to the vehicle speed.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 13

The automatic transaxle may be used to great effect if the vehicle becomes stuck in snow or mud by allowing the vehicle to be rocked to and fro. The engine speed should be held at approximately 1,000rpm by means of the accelerator pedal and the selector lever moved between the "D" and "R" positions to induce a rocking motion.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal with the brakes applied and the selector at the "R", "D", "2" or "L" position.
o Turn the overdrive switch on for good fuel economy and smooth driving. But if engine braking is needed in the "D" range or if repeated upshifting and downshifting between the 3rd and 4th gear is needed when climbing a gentle slope, it is recommended that the overdrive switch be turned off. Turn the overdrive switch back on immediately afterward.

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.

Excessive depressing of the accelerator pedal under the tyres slip condition such as moving out of the mud or fresh snow etc, may cause severe damage to the transmission. If this condition exists, it may be advisable to have the vehicle towed.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

14

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS will increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system (Electronic Stability Program) is functioning properly.

During ABS (ESP) operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the engine compartment whilst braking. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning property.

WARNING:

ABS (ESP) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system may be longer than for those without it, in the following road conditions.

o Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

o Driving with tyre chains installed. o Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

These roads should be driven at reduced speeds. The safety features of an ABS (ESP) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns at accelerated speeds.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or whilst making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the front wheels.

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 15

CAUTION:

When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed.

WARNING:

Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery driving surfaces should be observed.

C300B010-GAT

TCS ON Mode

In the TCS ON mode, the indicator in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated.

NOTE:

1) Turn off the engine. Then restart the engine, and the TCS mode will automatically turn "ON".
2) When the traction control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click is heard from the engine compartment; however, this is only the sound of traction control being checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase.

C300D02O-GAT

Indicator and Warning

The indicator should illuminate when the ignition key is tumed to "ON" or "START", but should go out after three seconds. If the indicator does not illuminate, have it checked by an Hyundai authorised repairer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the device, TCS illuminates as a warning.

If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine.

Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an Hyundai authorised repairer.

NOTE:

When TCS illuminates, traction control is automatically deactivated for safety.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

CS10A01JM-EAT

(Not all models)

ESP C310A01FC-D

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system is designed to stabilise the vehicle during cornering manuevers. ESP checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESP will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

CAUTION:

Driving with varying tyre or wheel size may cause the ESP system to malfunction. When replacing tyres, make sure they are the same size as your original tyres.

WARNING:

Electronic stability program is a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed.

C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator in the instrument cluster will blink.

If you turn the system off by pressing the ESP switch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on and stay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stability control will be deactivated. Adjust your driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator should go off.

NOTE:

The ESP mode will automatically be turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted.

EFFECTIVE BRAKING DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 17

C310D01JM-EAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after approximately 3 seconds.

If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP or ESP-OFF indicator does not go out after approximately 3 seconds, have the vehicle checked by Hyundai authorised repairer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the device whilst driving, ESP-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning. If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine.

Then, start the engine again to check if the ESP-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by Hyundai authorised repairer.

SC140A2-E

Braking system performance and friction material life are greatly affected by the driving style adopted. The following suggestions are made to assist in achieving the best results from the braking system.

o Anticipate the road and conditions ahead in order that heavy braking may be avoided.
When descending longgradients, use the engine to assist in retarding the vehicle to minimize the possibility of brake fade occurring.
When trailer towing, ensure that the trailer brakes function correctly and use engine braking to assist the vehicle braking system.
o Use only genuine Hyundai replacement brake pads and shoes to ensure consistent friction characteristics and wear rates.
o After driving through deep water (e.g. fording), the brakes may become wet and performance reduced. Always check brake efficiency after emerging from the water and dry the brakes by lightly depressing the brake pedal several times whilst driving slowly.

o Apply the parking brake only when the vehicle is at rest.
o Since the power assistance provided by the brake servo is derived from the engine, coasting with the engine turned off or towing of the vehicle with the engine turned off will result in greatly increased pedal pressures being required to stop the vehicle.
Do not hold the vehicle on an incline with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.
o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engage the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the car from rolling, block the wheels.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

SC150A1-F

You can save fuel and get more miles from your car if you follow these suggestions:

Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
oDrive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.
Take care of your tyres. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tyre wear. Check the tyre pressures at least once a month.
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tyre wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details).
o Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your car should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight is an enemy of good fuel economy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER MOTORING 19

o Remember, your car does not require extended warm-up. As soon as the engine is running smoothly, you can drive away. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.
Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens to you, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by the engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

SC160A1-F

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tyre wear will be held to a minimum.

SC170A1-E

The onset of winter conditions subject motor vehicles to greater operating demands. Therefore, the following suggestions will assist in maintaining peak performance and reliability during these periods:

ZC170B1-E

Electrical System

Winter conditions impose severe demands upon vehicle electrical systems, particularly the charging circuit. The battery condition and performance along with the alternator performance and drive belt condition should be checked prior to the onset of winter.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 20

ZC170C1-E

Anti-freeze/Corrosion inhibitor

The cooling system must always contain an Ethylene-Glycol based anti-freeze solution. The system is filled during manufacture with solution of the correct strength which should be checked before the onset of winter and adjusted or changed as required.

NOTE:

The anti-freeze solution contains a corrosion inhibitor to prevent degradation of the aluminum castings contained within the engine. Therefore, never, drain the system and refill with water only.

In addition, anti-freeze solution must ALWAYS be used in vehicles fitted with air conditioning, to prevent the heater matrix from freezing and subsequently bursting with the refrigeration system in use.

ZC170D1-E

Door Locks

Should the door lock mechanism become frozen, a proprietary lock de-icer should be used. Alternatively, warming the door key may thaw the door lock. However, the key should be handled carefully to avoid burning the fingers. Never attempt to thaw a frozen door lock using hot water, since the water will eventually freeze and compound the problem.

NOTE:

The proper temperature for using the immobiliser key is from -40°F to 176°F (-40°C to 80°C). If you heat the immobiliser key over 176°F (80°C) to open the frozen lock, it may cause damage to the transponder in its head.

SC170E1-E

Windscreen Washers and Wipers

The windscreen washer bottle should be filled with a solution of water and a proprietary winter screen wash additive. The windscreen wipers should not be used if the blades are frozen to the windscreen or if they are covered with snow, before this is removed.

NOTE:

Never allow undiluted screen washer fluid additive to spill upon the paintwork or use engine coolant anti-freeze since damage to the paintwork may result.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 TRAILER AND CARAVAN 21

When driving in extreme conditions, the windscreen wiper blades may fail to clear the screen properly due to the formation of ice upon the blade edge. It will therefore be necessary to periodically remove such ice to restore their efficiency.
o If the power operated door mirrors become frozen, attempts to adjust

these may damage the mechanism.

The formation of snow or ice built up inside the wheel arches may interfere with the road wheels or steering mechanism. In such instances, unusual noises or an increase in steering effort may result. Therefore, ensure that the wheel arches are checked periodically and any accumulated snow or ice removed.
o It is advisable to carry emergency equipment including, torch, shovel, tow rope, blankets etc., if a journey is to be undertaken into areas of severe road conditions.

Nose weight

Total trailer weight

C190ED1L

WARNING:

It is not recommended that the vehicle be used for towing until the first 1,000 miles of Running in has been completed. All Hyundai MATRIX models are suited to towing trailers and caravans up to the limits indicated on page 2-23. MATRIX models fitted with automatic transaxle have a transaxle oil cooler and further transaxle cooling should not be required.

⊕

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

SC20061-E

TOWING ATTACHMENTS

It is strongly recommended that only an Hyundai Approved towing attachment is used to ensure that the loads placed upon the body structure are correctly distributed. The use of a non-approved attachment will result in the invalidation of the vehicle warranty. Hyundai towing attachments are designed and constructed to ensure maximum towing performance and ease of fitment. A range of accessories including electrical kits are available through the Hyundai authorised repairer network.

It is of the utmost importance that those areas of the vehicle which are subjected to greater stress during towing are maintained in accordance with the recommendations given at the end of this book. In addition, the daily operating checks relating to engine oil, transmission oil and tyres must be performed at each refuelling to ensure maximum reliability and safety.

The use of a proprietary stabiliser will assist in achieving an inherently stable outfit but whilst the use of such equipment will improve the characteristics of a balanced outfit, it will not compensate for a badly loaded and therefore unstable outfit.

The tyres and braking equipment fitted to the trailer or caravan must be maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Special attention should be paid to tyres which deteriorate through time and exposure rather than as a result of the distances towed. The inside walls of the tyres should be inspected along with the outside walls for cracking and damage. The trailer wheel nut torque must be checked on a regular basis, preferably before each towing session.

The trailer hitch and the safety catch mechanism must be maintained in good working order. The trailer break away cable or chain should be inspected for damage and should be attached to the vehicle towing attachment each and every time the trailer is hitched to the vehicle.

Whilst towing, the performance of the vehicle will be reduced in terms of acceleration, braking and handling due to the increased loads placed upon the vehicle. The driver should anticipate the change in characteristics and adjust the driving style in keeping with these changes. Care should be exercised when cornering and braking to prevent the outfit becoming uncontrollable by reducing cornering speeds and allowing increased braking distances.

The driver should exercise care to ensure that when pulling away from rest particularly on uphill gradients the clutch unit is not subjected to excessive slippage which will reduce the useful life of this component. Use of the "Overdrive Off" "2" and "L" positions when driving vehicles with automatic transmission will assist with braking performance when long down hill gradients are encountered. Improved acceleration performance will be available by selecting "Overdrive Off", "2", or "1" depending upon road speed if it is found that the transmission unit makes an undesirable upshift whilst hill climbing or overtaking. The transmission unit should be operated in "D" with the Overdrive "On" under normal circumstances to enhance fuel economy and reduce noise and engine wear.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 23

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight C190E2L

NOTE:

o The total gross vehicle weight with trailer must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle, driver, all passengers and their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer nose weight and other optional equipment.

The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). It is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR. Improper trailer loading and/or too much luggage in the boot can overload the rear axle. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again.
o The maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device : 52kg

Towing Bracket Attachment Location C190ED1FC

o The maximum permissible overhang of the coupling point : 760 mm.

CAUTION:

The use of a badly loaded or overloaded trailer may result in instability. This following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded trailer weight or the Gross Train Weight must not exceed the values in the following chart.

kg

			Maximum Towable Weight
			Trailer Weight	Nose weight
With Brake Type	1.5Diesel 1.6/1.8L	Manual transaxle	1,300	52
	1.6/1.8L	Auto transaxle	1,100
Without Brake Type			550

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

24

YC200E2-E

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check towbar ball and safety cable connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights, brake lights, and turn signals.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (Less than 60 MPH)
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions.
4. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic transaxle).
5. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift whilst driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of all tyres on the trailer and your vehicle. Low tyre pressure can seriously affect the handling. Also check the spare tyre.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting.
   When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. If there is too much wind buffeting slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

8. When parking your vehicle and trailer, especially on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Turn your front wheels into the curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic). In addition, we advise the use of wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tyres.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

10. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or sudden stops.
12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
14. When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect.

When climbing a long grade, downshift the transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 25

1. If you have to stop whilst going uphill, do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. This can cause the automatic transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake or footbrake.

NOTE:

When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently.

CAUTION:

If overheating should occur when towing, (temperature gauge reads near the red zone), taking the following actions may reduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.
2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.
4. Whilst in stop and go traffic, place the gear selection in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the Engine Will not Start .... 3-2 Jump Starting .... 3-3 If the Engine Overheats .... 3-4 Spare Tyre .... 3-6 In the Event of a Puncture .... 3-7 Changing A Flat Tyre .... 3-7 If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed .... 3-12 Emergency Towing .... 3-14 If You Lose Your Keys.... 3-14

⊕

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

SD020A1-E

Seek assistance from the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer with regard to the method of ignition and fuel system diagnosis.

CAUTION:

If the engine refuses to start, no attempt should be made to push or tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transaxle or fuel injection will not be able to be started in this manner since no drive is transmitted through the automatic transaxle whilst the engine is not running, and in the case of fuel injected derivatives, the fuel pump will not operate under tow start conditions. In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust catalyst, damage to the catalyst may result if the vehicle is tow started.

SD020B1-E

If the Engine Cannot be Cranked

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment and battery housing (no visible text or symbols)

1. If the vehicle is fitted with manual transaxle, ensure that the clutch pedal is depressed whilst cranking the engine. If the vehicle is fitted with automatic transaxle, ensure that the transaxle selector is at the "P" or "N" position.
2. Check the battery terminals and connections to ensure that these are clean and also tight.
3. If the ignition warning lights dim when the engine is cranked and the battery terminals have been checked, a discharged battery is indicated.
4. Do not attempt to push or tow start the vehicle, refer to "Jump Starting" for information regarding engine starting when the battery is discharged.

D010C02A-EAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start

Mechanical assembly diagram showing engine components and shafts (no text or labels)

1. Check fuel level.
2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all connectors at ignition coils and spark plugs(For Petrol Engine) or check all connectors at glow plug and glow plug relay(For Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a Hyundai authorised repairer or seek other qualified assistance.

JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 3

AD02001-E

If Engine Stalls Whilst Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your hazard lights.
3. Try starting the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, see "IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START"

SD000A2-E

Discharged battery Booster battery 12V HFC4002

CAUTION:

Personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur if jump starting is not performed correctly. If any doubt exists as to how this operation should be performed, seek assistance from qualified personnel.

WARNING:

Motor vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid and emit hydrogen gas. Protective clothing should be worn and care exercised to prevent the acid from coming into contact with skin or clothing and the vehicle. Naked lights should not be permitted in the vicinity of the battery. Care should be exercised to prevent sparks occurring during connection. If acid accidentally comes into contact with skin or eyes, the affected area should immediately be flushed with copious amounts of water and medical assistance sought.

1. Ensure that the booster battery is 12 volt type. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, ensure that the two vehicles are not touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary electrical equipment in both vehicles.
3. Ensure that the engine of the vehicle providing the jump start is running prior to connection of the jump cables.

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

4

1. Connect the red jump cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Attach the black jump cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery, and the other end to a ground point within the engine compartment of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect to the negative battery terminal of the flat battery since sparks may be generated with the subsequent risk of explosion.
3. Raise the booster vehicle engine speed to 2,000 r.p.m. and start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery.
4. Switch "ON" the main beam headlamps before carefully removing the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment. Once the jumper cables have been removed, switch "OFF" the main beam headlamps.

CAUTION:

If the jump cables are incorrectly installed, damage to the vehicle electrical system may occur, in particular the electronic components such as the Fuel Injection system computer and the Automatic Transaxle computer. The battery must never be disconnected whilst the engine is running.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

D030A02TB-EAT

If the temperature gauge indicates overheating:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from under the bonnet stop the engine. Do not open the bonnet until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is broken. If it is not broken, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 5

WARNING:

Whilst the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

1. If the water pump drive belt is broken or coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for assistance.

2. Proceed with caution until it is established that the engine is operating normally. If the engine overheats repeatedly, the advice of a Hyundai authorised repairer should be sought.

WARNING

(Diesel only):

Never work on injection system with engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body. People using pacemakers should not move closer than 30cm etc. to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room whilst engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot since steam and boiling water may be ejected from the radiator resulting in burns or scalding.

CAUTION:

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai authorised repairer.

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6

D040A01FC-EAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TYRE

The following instructions for the temporary spare tyre should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon as possible after installing the spare tyre, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tyre pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure whilst the tyre is stored.

Spare Tyre Pressure

Tyre Size	T115/70R(D)15
Inflation Pressure	420 kPa (60 psi)

1. The spare tyre should only be used temporarily and should be returned to the luggage compartment as soon as the original tyre can be repaired or replaced.
2. Continuous use at speeds of over 80 km/h (50 mph) is not recommended.

3. As the temporary spare tyre is specifically designed for your car, it should not be used on any other vehicle.

4. The temporary spare tyre should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tyre, snow tyre, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the temporary spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.

5. The temporary spare tyre pressure should be checked once a month whilst the tyre is stored.

CAUTION:

o Do not use snow chains with your temporary spare tyre.
o Do not use more than one temporary spare tyre at a time.

SPARE WHEELSPARE TYRE

SD050A2-E

(Not all models)

The spare wheel is stored under the luggage compartment floor and is accessed from within the luggage compartment by lifting the carpet and the floor panel.
To remove the spare wheel, unscrew the retainer, rotating this in an counterclockwise direction and lift out the wheel. To replace the wheel, screw the retainer by hand until tight having located the wheel in the luggage compartment floor well. The inflation pressure of the spare wheel should be checked at least monthly and whenever the wheel is fitted to the vehicle.

Spare Tyre Pressure

Tyre Size	Full Size
Inflation Pressure	210 kPa (30 psi)

IN THE EVENT OF A CHANGING A FLAT TYRE IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 7

IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

SD000A1-E If a puncture occurs whilst driving the vehicle:

1. Bring the car to rest as soon as it is safe to do so and with the minimum amount of braking required which will assist in maintaining the maximum amount of control. The vehicle should be parked wherever possible upon firm level ground to facilitate wheel changing.
2. If the vehicle is creating a hazard and the road conditions do not permit the wheel to be changed safely, assistance should be sought.
3. Passengers must not be allowed to remain inside the vehicle during wheel changing. If a puncture occurs whilst the vehicle is on a motorway, the passengers should take refuge on the motorway embankment to avoid the possibility of injury occurring should the vehicle be struck by other motorway traffic.
4. Wheel changing should be performed according to the following instructions.

CHANGING A FLAT TYRE

SD070A1-E

Side view of a car tire mounted on a surface, showing wheel rim and side profile (no text or symbols)

It is of the utmost importance that care is exercised when changing road wheels. Ensure that the parking brake is set and that the gear shift lever is in reverse (P, if the vehicle has automatic transaxle).

D050K01FC-EAT

Wheel Cap (Not all models)

Groove HFC4023

1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to avoid scratching.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the groove of the wheel cap and pry gently to remove the wheel cap.
3. Change the flat tyre.

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

8

Groove Boss HFC1024

1. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the boss of the wheel cap in the groove of the wheel, hitting the centre of the wheel cap with hand.

D060B01FC-EAT

1. Obtain Spare Tyre and Tool
   

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a gear and valve (no text or symbols)

Remove the spare wheel and take out the jack and tool bag from the luggage room.

NOTE:

The jack is equipped on the underside of the luggage mat in the vehicle.

SD070D1-E

1. Block the Wheel
   

Flat tyre D06DC02FC

Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat tyre to prevent the vehicle from rolling when the vehicle is raised on the jack.

fcuk-3.p65 12/27/2006, 10:15 AM8

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 9

S0070E1-E
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

Side view of a car tire with a yellow arrow indicating a specific point on the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. To loosen the nuts, turn the wheel brace counterclockwise. Ensure that the wheel brace socket is seated properly on the nut and that it cannot slip. Do not remove the nuts at this stage.

SD070F1-F
4. Put the Jack in Place

Side view illustration of a minivan with two side-view cutouts highlighting the front and rear sections (no text or symbols)

The base of the jack should be placed on firm, level ground. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing.

SD070G1-E
5. Raising the Vehicle

Wrench bar Wheel nut wrench HFC4022

After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or sand, it may be necessary to place a stout piece of timber under the base of the jack to prevent it from sinking.
Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare wheel can be installed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

10

WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! The jack is solely designed for wheel changing and is not intended to support the vehicle for other purposes. The use of purpose designed supports is necessary whilst the vehicle is raised and the operator is required to get underneath.

SD070H1-E

1. Changing Wheels
   

Close-up of a car wheel and tire assembly (no visible text or symbols)

Using the wheel brace, remove the nuts and slide the wheel off the hub and wheel studs. Lie the wheel flat to prevent it from rolling. Ensure that the faces of the wheel and hub are clean. Position the spare wheel over the studs and slide it up to the hub.

Illustration of a car tire cleaning operation with hand applying material to the wheel (no text or symbols)

WARNING:

It is important that the faces of the wheel and hub are clean prior to installing the wheel. The presence of dirt or other matter in the wheel or hub faces could result in the wheel nuts becoming loose whilst the vehicle is being driven.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 11

SD0701-E

1. Re-install Wheel Nuts
   

Side view of a car with a tire and suspension mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Fit the wheel nuts onto the studs and tighten with the wheel brace.
SD070J1-E

1. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts
   

Side view of a car tire mounted on a surface, showing tire tread and wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Lower the car to the ground turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. When the vehicle is firmly on the ground, remove the jack and tighten the wheel nuts securely. At the first available opportunity, the wheel nut torque should be checked with a suitable torque wrench.

SD070K1-E
After changing wheels

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a valve and gear (no text or symbols)

The pressure of the spare tyre should be checked at the first available opportunity. If any doubt exists as to the tyre pressure, the vehicle should be driven slowly to the nearest service station and the tyre pressure checked and adjusted as required.

Wheel nut tightening torque

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 90-110 Nm (65-80 lb.ft)

⊕

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

12

If the valve cap is lost from any of the valves, a replacement should be obtained and fitted at the first available opportunity. The valve cap prevents the ingress of dirt which may cause the valve to stick and therefore leak and is part of the valve sealing function.

Ensure that the spare wheel, jack and wheel nut wrench as well tools are correctly located in the boot of the vehicle to prevent damage and noise.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE TOWED

D060A010-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done by your Hyundai authorised repairer or a commercial tow truck service. This will help assure that your vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. In any case, rather than risk damage to your car, it is suggested that you show this information to the tow truck operator. Be sure that a safety chain system is used and that all local laws are observed.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.

CAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed incorrectly!
o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral. o When the engine will not start, be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position.

D080G010-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3 13

CAUTION:

o When towing the vehicle, take care not to cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle.

Illustration of a tow truck and a car with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

Do not tow with sling type truck as this may cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, be sure the parking brake is released.

NOTE:

Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
o Manual Transaxle: If you do not use a towing dolly, place the ignition key in the "ACC" position and put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".

CAUTION:

Do not tow with the key removed or in the "LOCK" position when towing from the rear without a towing dolly.

o Automatic Transaxle:

Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

CAUTION:

Illustration of a truck and two cars with a yellow prohibition sign above (no text or symbols on the vehicles or background)

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with all the wheels off the ground.

3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

14

EMERGENCY TOWING

D000005A-EAT

Front Rear D080001FC

For emergency towing when no commercial tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under the front/rear of your vehicle. Do not attempt to tow your vehicle in this manner on any unpaved surface. This could result in serious damage to your vehicle.

Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels, drive train, axles, steering or brakes are damaged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine running). A driver must be in the towed vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

NOTE:

Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

D120A01A-EAT

Information about the key of immobiliser system will be found on page 1-4.

CAUTION:

If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h) and for more than 15 miles (25 km).

Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position.

APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Protection .... 4-2 Underbody Coatings .... 4-2 Valeting .... 4-3 Interior.... 4-5 fcuk-4.p65 12/27/2006, 10:15 AM1

4 APPEARANCE CARE CORROSION PROTECTION 2

SE020A1-E

Protecting Your Hyundai From Corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices, every Hyundai is built to retain the original factory finish for many years. However, long term durability is also greatly dependant upon maintaining the various protection systems and coatings used in manufacture since constant, exposure to the elements will result in a breakdown and loss of effectiveness. The following suggestions are made to assist in the maintenance of the vehicle bodywork.

SE03041-E

Underbody Coatings

Every Hyundai passenger car receives a full underbody and cavity injection treatment during production. In order that this treatment may retain maximum effectiveness it is recommended that the underbody receives a power wash and a thorough inspection after each winter season. In doing so any accumulations of mud, which act as moisture traps and combine with road salts to accelerate corrosion will be removed. In order to maintain the Anti Perforation Warranty, the requirements regarding the retreatment programme must be observed in accordance with the Terms and Conditions outlined in the separate Anti Perforation Warranty Booklet.

NOTE:

The underbody should never be steam cleaned since the underbody coating may be removed by this process.

During the interim period between power washing the underbody, the more vulnerable areas such as wheel arches should be hosed off particularly during the winter season to prevent prolonged contact with road salts.

Ensure that the various drain points located at the bottom of the door panels and sills are kept clear to prevent water from becoming trapped within the cavities. Wherever possible, the parking of the vehicle in a confined, poorly ventilated location (a garage for example) should be avoided when the vehicle is wet or is covered with snow or ice. Under these conditions, the internal cavities of the vehicle will remain damp for prolonged periods of time which will encourage corrosion. Parking the vehicle where good ventilation exists (outside for example) is preferable.

VALETING 3 APPEARANCE CARE 4

SE040A2-E

Regular cleaning of the exterior paintwork serves two important functions. Firstly, the removal of abrasive dirt and contaminants will maintain the lustre of the paintwork and will prevent discolouration and dulling due to prolonged contact.

Secondly, the presence of damage through impact or abrasion will be apparent allowing early rectification to be made thus preventing corrosion from becoming established and spreading beneath the paint film. To avoid "water spotting" the vehicle should not be washed in direct sunlight particularly in the case of vehicles having dark body colours. The heat from the sun rays is absorbed by the paint film increasing the surface temperature. This action causes water used for washing to evaporate quickly leaving behind the deposits from the water and the shampoo used.

Use only a shampoo intended for the purpose and ensure that the body work is thoroughly wet to soften the dirt film prior to attempting to remove this.

After removing the dirt film with a soft sponge, the body work should be thoroughly rinsed and then dried with a good quality chamois leather to prevent streaking or spotting of the paint work.

Household detergents, solvents and abrasive cleaning materials should not be used in order to avoid damaging the paint film. Plastic wheel covers should be cleaned using a sponge and water. Cast alloy wheels should be cleaned using a mild soap or neutral detergent. Abrasive compounds must not be used since in the event of these damaging the lacquer coating, oxidization of the aluminium wheel will occur, spoiling the appearance. The use of a toothbrush will facilitate cleaning between the wheel "spokes".

CAUTION:

Black-and-white photo of an open car with a hand emitting exhaust smoke, no visible text or symbols

o Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

o Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

APPEARANCE CARE 4 BUMPER MAINTENANCE BODY WORK REPAIRS

SE04061-E

Stain/Spot Removal

Should tree sap, dead insects or tar prove to be difficult to remove from the paint film, turpentine or a proprietary paint cutting compound may be used. Ensure that the area to be cleaned is not rubbed intensively to prevent breaking through the colour coat and exposing the under coat.

BUMPER MAINTENANCE

SE040E1-E

The special material from which the bumpers are manufactured warrants special attention to preserve the appearance of the bumpers. Avoid contact with battery electrolyte or brake fluid and ensure that accidental spillages are immediately flushed with water.

Do not use abrasive cleaning materials which may damage the bumpers.

Avoid subjecting the bumpers to high temperatures E.g encountered in high bake paint ovens.

BODY WORK REPAIRS

SED40F1-E

In the event of the body work sustaining damage, the following points should be noted prior to repairs being undertaken. If body panels are replaced or repaired, anti corrosion treatment must be applied to the repair area. The product used must be compatible with those used in manufacture. It is recommended that repairs are entrusted to a Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that replacement parts used are of the same high quality as those used in manufacture of the vehicle and that the correct repair methods and materials will ensure adequate levels of corrosion protection and the continued validity of the Anti Perforation Warranty.

SE040C1-F

Polishing

The exterior paint work should be polished with a proprietary wax polish when water no longer collects in bead form on the paint work. The instructions of the product manufacturer should be adhered to.

INTERIOR APPEARANCE CARE 4 5

SE050A1-E

During the winter period, it is possible that the passenger compartment flooring may become wet from damp footwear or quantities of snow adhering to footwear. The carpet should not be allowed to remain in this condition since the carpet may begin to create musty smells and will promote corrosion of the floor pan in addition to the carpet and under felt beginning to rot.

SE050D1-E

Seat Belts

Seat belts should be cleaned only with a mild soap solution. Strong detergents, solvents or bleaches may damage the belt webbing and therefore reduce the effectiveness of the belt. Belts which display signs of fraying, wear or cuts should be replaced.

SE050C1-E

Interior Valeting

The soft trim and carpets should be maintained with the regular use of a vacuum cleaner. Heavy soiling should be removed with a dry cleaning agent recommended for this purpose following the instructions of the product manufacturer. Paint thinner, solvents or other such cleaning materials should not be used since damage to the upholstery may result.

SE050E1-E

Windows

A proprietary glass cleaner should be used to clean the inside of the windows. However, the rear heated windshield must only be cleaned using a light horizontal cleaning action. Care should be exercised to avoid the use of abrasive cleaners or contact with items of jewellery which may damage the heating elements.

fcuk-4.p65 12/27/2006, 10:15 AM5

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintenance and Servicing Requirements .... 5-2 Scheduled Maintenance .... 5-3 Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions .... 5-6 Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .... 5-7 fcuk-5.p65 12/27/2006, 10:15 AM1

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING REQUIREMENTS

SF020A1-E

To ensure the continued reliability and safety of the vehicle, certain routine maintenance operations are required at specific mileage or time intervals. It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner to ensure that the maintenance schedules shown in both this Owners Manual and the Warranty and Service Passport are adhered to.

The new vehicle warranty may be invalidated if the routine maintenance operations are not performed in line with the recommendations outlined and the safety and durability of the vehicle adversely affected.

It is recommended that all maintenance operations with the exception of the daily operating checks are entrusted to a Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that the latest repair and maintenance procedures and specialised servicing tools are employed.

In addition, the use of genuine Hyundai replacement parts will ensure that the vehicle safety and performance will not be compromised.

NOTE:

The inspection and testing of certain electronic fuel injection/engine management and automatic transmission control systems require specialised electronic equipment specifically designed for Hyundai vehicles. The use of general purpose electrical test equipment may result in damage to the control unit microprocessors.

SF020C2-E

Specified Scheduled Procedures

The Specified scheduled procedures are listed in the maintenance charts beginning at page 5-3. The operations specified must be performed at the time or mileage intervals shown irrespective of whether the mileage interval has been reached before the specified time interval.

Certain lubricants and components degrade with both time and mileage (e.g. engine oil and brake fluid) and therefore it is not permissible to base the maintenance schedule upon mileage alone. It is strongly recommended that the maintenance operations are performed by the factory-trained or distributor-trained technicians at your Hyundai authorised repairer because of the need for specialised knowledge and tooling and to ensure that no possibility of invalidating the manufacturers warranty exists.

The maintenance schedules relate to vehicles operated under normal conditions, vehicles which are operated under adverse conditions will require more frequent maintenance which is described at page 5-6.

NOTE:

Service schedules may change depending on individual country needs. Please ask your local Hyundai authorised repairer for a copy of the service schedule that relates to that country.

SF030B1-F

SERVICE HISTORY

It is important that all scheduled maintenance services are recorded in the warranty and service passport to ensure that proof of maintenance is available when warranty service is required.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

3

YF010A2-E

In order to ensure continued reliability, safety and longevity, regular maintenance performed at the intervals specified is essential. The maintenance intervals specified are based both on time elapsed and mileage covered since the previous maintenance service was performed. However, under severe operating conditions, certain scheduled operations should be performed at shorter intervals. Regular maintenance should be entrusted to Hyundai authorised repairer who is best able to provide the expertise required to ensure optimum operational performance.

In addition the use of Hyundai replacement parts and service consumables will ensure that the original build quality, operational performance and safety are maintained.

F030B03FC-EAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

NO.	DESCRIPTION	MILES X 1,000	10	20	30	40	50	60
		MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (PETROL)
1	ENGINE OIL & FILTER		R	R	R	R	R	R
2	DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON)			I		I		I
3	FUEL FILTER (MFI)					R
4	FLUID LEAKS		I	I	I	I	I	I
5	TIMING BELT				I		R
6	VENTILATION HOSES						I
7	AIR CLEANER FILTER		I	I	R	I	I	R
8	SPARK PLUGS			R		R		R
9	VALVE CLEARANCE (1.8 DOHC)		See Note (1)

Note : (1) INSPECT AND ADJUST EVERY 60,000 MILE OR 48 MONTHS.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4

F030D02FC-EAT

R : Replace

I: Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

NO.	DESCRIPTION	MILES X 1,000	10	20	30	40	50	60	70
		MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72	84
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL)
1	ENGINE OIL & FILTER (API Class : CH-4 or ABOVE) See Note(1)(ACEA Class : B-4 or ABOVE)		R	R	R	R	R	R	R
2	AIR CLEANER FILTER		I	I	R	I	I	R	I
3	FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE			R		R		R
4	TIMING BELT								R
5	DRIVE BELT (FOR P/STR'G PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON)			I		I		R
6	VACUUM PUMP & VACUUM HOSE		I	I	I	I	I	I	I
7	VACUUM PUMP OIL HOSE		I	I	I	I	I	I	I
8	FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS		I	I	I	I	I	I	I

Note : (1) ON A DAILY BASIS, WHENEVER THE VEHICLE IS REFUELLED OR BEFORE STARTING A LONG TRIP : "I"

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 5

F030C02FC-EAT

R : Replace

I: Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

NO.	DESCRIPTION	MILES X 1,000	10	20	30	40	50	60
		MONTHS	12	24	36	48	60	72
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1	COOLING SYSTEM		I	I	I	I	I	I
2	COOLANT		See Note (1)
3	ENGINE COOLANT SPECIFIC GRAVITY		I	I	I	I	I	I
4	MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL		I	I	I	I	I	I
5	AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID		I	I	I	I	I	R
6	BRAKE PIPES, HOSES, AND CONNECTIONS		I	I	I		I	I
7	BRAKE FLUID		I	R	I	R	I	R
8	CLUTCH FLUID		I	R	I	R	I	R
9	REAR BRAKE LININGS AND CYLINDERS			I		I		I
10	BRAKE PADS		I	I	I	I	I	I
11	SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM		I	I	I	I	I	I
12	FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS		I	I	I	I	I	I
13	POLLEN FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)		R	R	R	R	R	R
14	REAR WHEEL BEARINGS		I	I	I	I	I	I
15	TYRE CONDITION AND PRESSURE (incl. Spare)		I	I	I	I	I	I
16	LUBRICATE LOCKS AND HINGES		I	I	I	I	I	I
17	CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS		I	I	I	I	I	I
18	ROAD TEST		I	I	I	I	I	I
19	CHECK ALL SYSTEMS WITH HI-SCAN		I	I	I	I	I	I

Note :(1) FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES OR 60 MONTHS. AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 30,000 MILES OR 24 MONTHS.

⊕

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A02FC-EAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM		MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER	PETROL ENGINE	R	EVERY 4,500 MILES OR 6 MONTHS	A, B,C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
	DIESEL ENGINE			A, B, C, D, F, H, I, J
AIR CLEANER FILTER		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, E
SPARK PLUGS		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	B, H
TIMING BELT		R	EVERY 37,000 MILES OR 48 MONTHS	D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE LININGS AND CYLINDERS		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM		I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, E, F
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL		R	EVERY 60,000 MILES	A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID		R	EVERY 27,000 MILES	A, C, E, F, G, H, I
POLLEN FILTER(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)		R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C,E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal tempera ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

7

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

6ZF080M1-A

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

6ZF06081-A

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil contamination and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

BZF08DC1-A

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections.

6ZF060D2-A

o Fuel lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

WARNING

(Diesel only):

Never work on injection system with engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it contacts the body. People using pacemakers should ensure that they keep a distance of 30cm from the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room whilst engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 8

6ZF080E1-A

o Timing Belt

Replace timing belt and inspect all associated parts related for damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately.

67E080G1-A

o Vapour Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

BZF06DF1-A

o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

6ZF060H1-A

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when filter is replaced.

6ZF060J1-A

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

F080N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.

6ZF070B1-A

o Cooling System

Check the cooling system part, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 9

6ZF070C1-A

o Engine Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

6ZF070D1-A

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:

If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range of the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use Hyundai Genuine ATF SP-III, DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., when adding or changing fluid.

6ZF070F1-A

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

6ZF070G2-A

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

6ZF070H1-A

o Rear Brake Drums And Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 10

6ZF070J1-A

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

SZF070M1-A

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive freeplay in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

6ZF070P1-A

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

6ZF070K1-A

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, silencer and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

6ZF070N1-A

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oil contamination and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

6ZF070Q1-A

o Air conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary.

6ZF070L1-A

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

OWNER MAINTENANCE Engine Compartment .... 6-2 Daily Operating Checks .... 6-5 Engine Oil .... 6-5 Engine Oil and Filter Replacement .... 6-9 Engine Coolant Checking and Replacing .... 6-12 Air Cleaner Element Replacement .... 6-14 Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) .... 6-18 Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .... 6-19 Brake System Checking .... 6-22 Checking the Clutch Fluid .... 6-23 Air Conditioning System Maintenance .... 6-24 Changing the Pollen Filter (In Front of Blower Unit) ...6-25 Checking Drive Belts .... 6-27 Checking and Replacing Fuses .... 6-28 Battery Maintenance .... 6-30 Eclectric Cooling Fans .... 6-31 Power Steering Fluid Level .... 6-31 Headlight Aiming Adjustment .... 6-34 Replacing Light Bulbs .... 6-36 Bulb Wattage .... 6-37 Fuse Panel Description.... 6-38

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01FC-EAT

(1.6 DOHC)

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

CAUTION:

When Inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

HFC5001

1. Air filter element
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir
4. Auto fuel cut switch

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Engine cover
9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Radiator cap

11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Not all models)
    12.Battery

12. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 3

G010001FC-EAT (1.8 DOHC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 CAUTION: When Inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged. HFC003

1. Air filter element
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir
4. Auto fuel cut switch

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Engine cover
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10. Radiator cap

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

HFC003

1. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Not all models)
   12.Battery
2. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 4

G010E02FC-EAT Diesel (1.5 CRDI)

1 2 3 4 5 CRO-16V 6 7 8 9 10 11

CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.
G010E02FC

1. Air filter element

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid and clutch fluid reservoir

4. Fuel filter

5. Relay box

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine oil level dipstick

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Radiator cap

10.Battery

1. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap

DAILY OPERATING CHECKS ENGINE OIL OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 5

SG02031-E

The following items should be checked on a daily basis or whenever the vehicle is refuelled, whichever occurs sooner.

o Engine oil level.
o Engine coolant level.
o Power steering fluid level.
o Brake fluid level.
o Windscreen washer fluid level.
o Battery condition.
o Tyre condition and pressures.
o Operation and cleanliness of all lighting equipment.
o Windscreen wiper and washer operation.
o Horn operation.
o Warning light operation.
o Adjustment and cleanliness of mirrors.
o Seat and seat belt adjustment and operation.
o Fluid leakage.

The vehicle must not be driven if the daily operating checks indicate that any item of equipment related to the safety or roadworthiness of the vehicle is not functioning correctly.

GOODA01FC-EAT

The correct engine oil level is of paramount importance. An excessively high or low oil level may result in irreparable damage being sustained by the engine. The engine oil level must be checked on a daily basis, whenever the vehicle is refuelled or before starting a long trip, whichever occurs sooner. In addition, it is imperative that only an approved grade and specification of oil is used to avoid the possibility of serious engine damage and premature wear. The use of "budget price" oil is a false economy that must be avoided if the maximum reliability and useful life is to be obtained from the vehicle.

G00B020-EAT

Recommended Oil Petrol engine

The engine oil quality should meet the following classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

The oil viscosity should be selected according to the operating environment of the engine by means of the table shown above. The engine oil recommendations are complete in themselves and the use of additives is neither required nor recommended. The use of engine oil additives may result in invalidation of the vehicle warranty.

Operation and cleanliness of all lighting equipment. Windscreen wiper and washer operation. Horn operation. Warning light operation. Adjustment and cleanliness of mirrors. Seat and seat belt adjustment and operation. Fluid leakage. The use of "budget price" oil is a false economy that must be avoided if the maximum reliability and useful life is to be obtained from the vehicle. The engine oil quality should meet the following classification. API SJ, SL or ABOVE ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE The oil viscosity should be selected according to the operating environment of the engine by means of the table shown above. The engine oil

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 6

NOTE:

SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred regardless of regional option and engine variation. If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is not available, secondary recommended engine oil for corresponding temperature range can be used.

HYUNDAI RECOMMENDS Shell HELIX Motor oils

G030003FC-EAT

Recommended Oil Diesel Engine

G030B01A

The correct engine oil level is of paramount importance.

An excessively high or low oil level may result in irreparable damage being sustained by the engine. The engine oil level must be checked on a daily basis, whenever the vehicle is refuelled or before starting a long trip, whichever occurs sooner.

In addition, it is imperative that only an approved grade and specification of oil is used to avoid the possibility of serious engine damage and premature wear. The use of "budget price" oil is a false economy that must be avoided if the maximum reliability and useful life is to be obtained from the vehicle.

The engine oil quality should meet the following classification:

API class: CH-4 or ABOVE ACEA class: B4 or ABOVE

NOTE:

SAE 0W-30 oil is for use in very cold zones. Its use should therefore be restricted only to driving in these type of sub-zero conditions. (Especially, not recommended for sustained high engine load and high speed operation.)

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 7

SG00C2-E Engine Oil Level
Petrol engine

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with visible components and a key inserted (no text or symbols)

Diesel engine

Mechanical assembly diagram showing components like gears and linkages (no text or labels)

The engine oil level should be checked with the engine at normal operating temperature and the vehicle parked upon level ground.

Prior to checking the level, the vehicle should be allowed to stand for several minutes after the engine has been switched off to allow the oil to drain back to the sump.

Withdraw the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag. Replace the dipstick fully and withdraw again when the oil level may be read from the stick. Normal oil level is indicated when the oil is present between the two marks on the stick. It is not necessary to add oil if the level is above the lower mark and in any case, oil must not be added to the degree that the level exceeds the upper mark. Replace the dipstick fully after checking the level.

WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

SG000D1-E

Engine Oil Replenishment
Petrol engine

Illustration of a hand pouring liquid into a car engine (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a diesel engine with a pitcher pouring liquid into the engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

If the indicated oil level is at or below the lower mark of the dipstick, oil should be added until the level is at or below the upper mark.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE

8

To add oil to the engine, remove the filler cap by rotating in an counterclockwise direction and pour engine oil into the engine. Before checking the level again, allow several minutes for the oil to drain into the sump. Replace the oil filler cap rotating it in a clockwise direction until tight.

The quantity of oil required to raise the level from the minimum to maximum level is approximately 1 litre.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is equal to about 1 liter(Petrol Engine)/1.2 liter(Diesel Engine) of oil.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Do not overfill to prevent engine to damage.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

ZG000E1-A

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Function of engine oil

Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine.

Engine oil consumption

It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil in the course of normal driving. The cause of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows;

o Engine oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.

A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated during engine operation sucks some of the oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil with some oil of the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.

The engine oil consumption is strongly effected by the viscosity and quality of oil, engine rpm and driving condition etc.

More engine oil may be consumed under severe driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent acceleration and deceleration, compared to normal driving.

⊕

OWNER MAINTENANCE

9

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REPLACEMENT

SG040A2-E

Petrol engine

1.6 DOHC Oil filler cap Oil filler Drain plug SSABV0A

1.8 DOHC Oil filler cap Oil filler Drain plug GD40A03E

The engine oil and filter must be changed at the time or mileage interval specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated under severe or adverse conditions, the oil and filter must be replaced more frequently.

To replace the oil and filter, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure that the engine is at normal operating temperature and park the vehicle on level ground with the parking brake securely applied and the engine turned off.
2. Open the bonnet and remove the oil filler cap.
3. Prepare a suitable receptacle to collect the displaced oil and remove the drain plug from the sump.

CAUTION:

The oil being drained from the engine will be hot. Care should be exercised to prevent scalding.

1. When the oil has drained from the sump, replace the drain plug using a new gasket ensuring that the plug is not over tightened.
2. Remove the oil filter by rotating counterclockwise, using a proprietary oil filter removal tool if necessary. Note that the oil filter will contain approximately 0.5 litres of oil and this should be collected in a suitable receptacle.
3. Install a new oil filter having smeared the sealing ring with clean oil and rotating clockwise until the filter contacts the mounting and then a further one half turn. Do not over-tighten

Tightening torque: 2.3 \~ 2.5 kgf.m

1. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.

2. Pour the specified quantity of the recommended oil into the engine and replace the filler cap. Start the engine and ensure that no oil leaks exist. Turn off the engine and after a couple minutes, recheck the oil level.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 10

CAUTION: Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Do not overfill to prevent engine to damage. WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oils may result in seri- ous skin disorders including der- matitis and cancer. Avoid contact with skin as far as possible and always wash thoroughly after any contact. Keep used oils out of reach of children. It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use only authorized waste collection facilities including civic amenity sites and garages for the disposal of used oil and oil filters. If In doubt, contact the local authority for dis- posal instructions.

G040604FC-EAT Diesel engine Oil filler cap Oil filter G040601FC

The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle).

Upper cap O-ring Centrepipe O-ring Oil filter element Oil filter housing G0140822FC

1. Open the bonnet and remove the engine oil level dipstick.
2. Loosen the oil filter upper cap with a proper tool from the oil filter housing until an O-ring is seen. Then, drain the oil completely.

fuk-6.p65 12/27/2006, 10:16 AM10

OWNER MAINTENANCE

11

1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.

2. Slide underneath the car and loosen the oil pan drain plug by turning it counterclockwise oil pan with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug.

3. After mounting a new centrepipe O-ring, new oil filter element and new O-ring to upper cap, install the upper cap to oil filter housing and retighten by turning it clockwise. Do not over-tighten.

Tightening torque : 2.5 kgf.m

1. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
   11.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:

o It is recommended that the engine oil and filter should be changed by an Hyundai authorised repairer.
o Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for maybe reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it into the household trash.

WARNING:

Used motor oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Wash your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you!

1. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new gasket and retighten by turning it clockwise.
   Oil pan drain plug tightening torque : 3.5 \~ 4.5 kgf.m
2. Pull out the oil filter upper cap with element from the oil filter housing. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt or oil accumulated around the oil filter housing.

CAUTION:

Do not use old oil filter upper cap O-ring and centrepipe O-ring.
9. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Do not overfill to preverd engine to damage.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE

12 ENGINE COOLANT CHECKING AND REPLACING

SG050A1-E

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot, since the system is pressurised and coolant may be ejected from the radiator resulting in scalding.

Diesel engine G050B02FC

G050B02FC

SG050B1-E Coolant recommended

Petrol engine G050B01FC

Only ethylene glycol based coolant with a corrosion inhibitor suited to aluminium alloy engine components should be used in the cooling system. No further additives or inhibitors should be used. The coolant specific gravity should be checked as prescribed in the maintenance schedule to ensure adequate frost and corrosion protection. In addition, the engine coolant must be replaced at the specified interval since the corrosion inhibitor properties deteriorate with time.

It is important to note that whilst an increase in the concentration of anti freeze gives an increase in the level of frost protection, a solution which is in excess of 65% anti freeze will result in reduced frost protection and engine overheating. Therefore the recommended concentration of 50% should not be exceeded for general use. The use of methanol based anti freeze compounds may result in engine overheating and will invalidate the vehicle warranty.

NOTE:

It is imperative that vehicles fitted with an air conditioning system have a coolant concentration of the recommended strength at all times. The use of the air conditioning system when the cooling system is filled with water only will result in the heater matrix freezing and subsequently bursting.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 13

SG050C1-E To Check the Coolant Level

3D rendering of a petrol engine component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

3D rendering of a diesel engine component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The engine coolant level may be observed through the side of the plastic coolant reservoir (expansion tank) when the engine is cold.

If the level is below the "L" mark, add coolant of the correct concentration until the level is between the "L" and "F" marks. If the level falls below the "L" mark on a regular basis despite being topped up, consult a Hyundai authorised repairer.

SC05002-E To Change the Coolant

The coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to ensure that coolant is not allowed to spill onto the paintwork since the finish may become damaged. If coolant spillage occurs, the affected area should be rinsed thoroughly with water.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied, and the engine allowed to cool. Do not attempt this operation whilst the engine is hot since burning or scalding may result.

2. Prepare a suitable receptacle to collect the displaced coolant and position this under the radiator drain tap.

3. With the heater temperature control set to the "HOT" position, remove the radiator cap and open the radiator drain tap.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism with no visible text or symbols

1. When the engine coolant has drained completely, close the drain tap ensuring that this is not over tightened.
2. Prepare a suitable quantity of new engine coolant (refer to section 9) and pour this into the radiator.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 14 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Illustration of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

G050D02FC

1. Start the engine with the radiator cap still removed and continue to add coolant as the level decreases as air is expelled from the system. When the level remains constant, replace the radiator cap and replenish the coolant reservoir.
2. When the engine is hot, check to ensure that no coolant leaks are present.

WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT

G070AD1E-EAT

Close-up mechanical assembly of a petrol engine component (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a diesel engine component with visible internal parts and wiring (no text or symbols)

To replace the air cleaner element, remove the air intake ducting from the air flow sensor body and unfasten the spring clips holding the air flow sensor top to the body.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

15

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES

G000A01A-EAT

Lift out the air flow sensor followed by the air cleaner element. Replacement of the element is the reverse of the above.

CAUTION:

The air flow sensor is a precision engineered electronic measuring device and therefore care should be exercised that the air flow sensor is not damaged during replacement of the element.
When removing the air cleaner element, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner element.

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure with an inset close-up of tissue (no text or labels)

CAUTION:

o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass since rapid wear and damage to the windscreen glass may result.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, petrol, etc.

To ensure maximum filtration performance and continued engine performance, only genuine Hyundai replacements should be used.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 16

G080B01HR-EAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper to the vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

Close-up of a mechanical component with yellow arrows indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

1. Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm.

Diagram of a mechanical linkage or cable assembly with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

1. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it.

To install the wiper blade

Diagram of a mechanical linkage or cable assembly with a yellow curved arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lower the wiper blade at the level of the wiper arm as shown in the drawing.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

17

WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR REPLENISH- MENT

Close-up of a curved road with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific track (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an audible "click" to engage in the end of the wiper arm.

SG09042-B

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve and handle mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

The level of windscreen washer fluid available should be checked on a daily basis. The level of fluid will be visible through the side of the reservoir. When the fluid is to be replenished, only a proprietary screen wash additive should be used and in the concentration recommended by the manufacturer. The windscreen washer reservoir has a total capacity of 3 litres.

CAUTION:

Engine coolant anti freeze must not be used in the windscreen washer system since damage to the paintwork may result. Undiluted windscreen washer additive must not be allowed to come into contact with the paintwork. If spillage occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Do not operate the windscreen washer for more than 15 seconds continuously or when the reservoir is empty since damage to the washer pump will result.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 18 CHECKING THE ORDER 7

WARNING:

o Windscreen washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks of flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or its occupants could occur.
o Windscreen washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink windscreen washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL

SG100A2-E MANUAL TRANSAXLE LUBRICANT

Filler plug Drain plug G100A01A

The manual transaxle lubricant must be checked and or changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Only those lubricants specified should be used in order to prevent gear shifting difficulties or transaxle damage.

WARNING:

The transaxle lubricant level should only be checked when the engine is cold to preclude the possibility of personal injury by contact with hot components.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the manual transaxle lubricant should be checked by Hyundai authorised repairer.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 19

G110A02E-EAT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

The automatic transaxle fluid level should be checked and changed at those intervals prescribed in the maintenance schedule. It is of paramount importance that only the specified fluid is used when replenishing or changing the fluid. The use of other fluids may irreparably damage the transaxle and invalidate the manufacturers warranty. In addition the ingress of dirt or lint may prevent correct functioning of the transaxle and care must be exercised to prevent the ingress of such matter.

NOTE:

Automatic transaxle fluid is a red in color. As driving distance increases, the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace based upon the changing color.

You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in section 5.

CAUTION:

The transaxle on fluid level must be checked with the engine running and at normal operating temperature and therefore care must be exercised to prevent injury occurring through contact with rotating or hot parts of the engine.

G110B04A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hundai Motor Co., Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:

Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause damage to the automatic transaxle. Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., If you are having your vehicle serviced at a facility other than a Hyundai authorised repairer, verify that the correct ATF is used for your vehicle.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 20

G110001FC-EAT

Fluid Capacity

The total fluid capacity of the transmission unit is 6.1 litres (1.6 DOHC)/6.7 litres(1.8 DOHC).

CAUTION:

The transaxle fluid level should be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This means that the engine, radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot so you should exercise great care not to burn yourself during this procedure.

G100B03A-GAT

Checking the automatic transaxle fluid level

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

The automatic transaxle fluid level should be checked regularly. Keep the vehicle on the level ground with the parking brake applied and check the fluid level according to the following procedure.

1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral) position and confirm the engine is running at normal idle speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up sufficiently (fluid temperature 70–80°C (158–176°F)), for example by 10 minutes usual driving, shift the selector lever through all positions then place the selector lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park) position.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 21

Fluid level should be within this range

C090A03FC

1. Confirm that the fluid level is in "HOT" range on the level gauge. If the fluid level is lower, add the specified fluid from the fill hole. If the fluid level is higher, drain the fluid from the drain hole.
2. If the fluid level is checked in cold condition (fluid temperature 20\~30°C (68\~86°F)) add the fluid to "COLD" line and then recheck the fluid level according to the above step 2.

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

WARNING

(Diesel only):

Never work on injection system with engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it contacts the body.

People using pacemakers should ensure that they keep a distance of 30cm from the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room whilst engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

22

Correct operation of the braking system is essential to the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, any maintenance operations other than those listed below should be entrusted to a Hyundai authorised repairer.

SG120C2-E

Brake Fluid Recommendations

Only brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications or higher may be used in the braking system. Care should be taken to observe the instructions and precautions printed upon the container.

SG12001-E

Brake Fluid Level

Petrol engine

MAX MIN HFC5005

Diesel engine

MAX MIN G12002PC

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically.

The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark, fluid should be added having carefully cleaned the area surrounding the reservoir cap to ensure that dirt is not allowed to enter the system. It should be noted that the brake fluid level will decrease slightly as the friction linings of the pads and shoes become worn and that this is a normal condition.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6

23

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

WARNING:

Brake fluid is hygroscopic and should never be stored in an unsealed container. The presence of water in the braking system will cause vapour locks and Increase the possibility of brake fade along with promoting corrosion within the braking system. The brake fluid must be changed at the specified time or mileage interval to ensure continued safe operation of the system. Brake fluid will cause rapid and serious damage to paintwork. If accidental spillage occurs, the affected area must be rinsed with water immediately. Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes or to be ingested and ensure that fluid is safely stored away from the reach of children.

SG130A1-C

To Check the Clutch Fluid

Petol engine MAX MIN HFC5005

Diesel engine MAX MIN G12002PC

The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other under bonnet checks.

The system should be checked for leakage at the same time.

Ensure that the clutch fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be inspected and repaired immediately.

⊕

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE

24

SG13062-E

Adding Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

CAUTION:

Brake fluid is hygroscopic and should never be stored in an unsealed container. Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid since damage to the rubber seals of the system may result.

WARNING:

Brake fluid will cause rapid and serious damage to paintwork. If accidental spillage occurs, the affected area must be rinsed with water immediately. Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes or to be ingested and ensure that fluid is safely stored away from the reach of children.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

SG140A1-E

Condenser

Ensure that the condenser is periodically inspected and that accumulations of dirt, dead insects and leaves etc, are removed to ensure that the efficiency of the system is not impaired. Care must be exercised to ensure that the condenser fins are not damaged during cleaning.

SG14DC2-F

Checking the Refrigerant

1. Start the engine and run at idle for several minutes with the refrigeration system running at the coldest setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold, have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai authorised repairer.

CAUTION:

Running the air conditioning system with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor.

SG140D1-E

Off Season Maintenance

The air conditioning must be run for ten minutes or so weekly during periods when the system would not normally be used to ensure that the compressor and seals are lubricated. If this precaution is not observed the compressor seals may become stuck to the compressor shaft and damaged when the system is next used resulting in a loss of refrigerant and damage to the compressor.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

25

CHANGING THE POLLEN FILTER

SG140B1-E Compressor Drive Belt

A/C 0.315 in. (8mm) TENSION PULLEY CRANK PULLEY GH10D01A

B140E02FC-EAT (In Front of Blower Unit)

The pollen filter is located in front of the blower unit behind the glove box. It helps to decrease pollutants from entering the car.

Close-up of a car interior showing a hand holding a knife, with an inset highlighting the blade area (no text or symbols visible)

Technical diagram of a vehicle interior showing structural components and airflow paths (no text or labels)

1. Remove the filter cover by pulling upward the hooks of the filter cover.

The air conditioning compressor drive belt should be checked to ensure freedom from damage or excessive wear and correct tension. The belt tension is correct when the belt deflects by about 0.3 inches (8 mm) when a force of 98 N is applied to the belt halfway between the compressor and crankshaft pulleys.

Adjustment of the belt should be entrusted to a Hyundai authorised repairer.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 26 CHECKING THE FREEPLAY

Interior view of a vehicle air vent with ventilation slots and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Replace the pollen filter with a new one.
2. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly.

SG150A1-E Steering Wheel

1.18 in. (30 mm) G150A21FC

Steering wheel freeplay should be checked to ensure that the specified value is not exceeded.

SG180A1-E Clutch Pedal

0.24 - 0.51 in. (6 ~ 13 mm) G180AD1E

The clutch pedal freeplay should be checked against the specified value. If the freeplay is not correct, the clutch should be adjusted by a Hyundai authorised repairer.

CAUTION:

Be sure to install the pollen filter in the direction of the arrow sign.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 CHECKING DRIVE BELTS 27

SG170A1-E

Brake Pedal

0.12 ~ 0.31 in. (3 ~ 8 mm) HXCS508

The brake pedal freeplay should be checked with the engine turned off. The pedal to floor clearance should be checked with the engine running and a load of 490 N applied to the pedal. If either value is incorrect, the necessary adjustment should be performed by a Hyundai authorised repairer. Pedal to floor clearance: 1.97 in. (50 mm)

G180A01A-GAT
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CLEARANCE

45.1 mm (1.78 in.) G180A01L

You need a helper to check the brake pedal clearance. With the engine running, have your helper press down on the brake pedal several times and then hold it down with a force of about 490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat. If the brake pedal clearance is not within the limits specified in the illustration, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

SG190A1-E
Petrol Engine

Water Pump Pulley 0.2~0.24 in. (5.1~6 mm) Crankshaft Pulley Alternator Pulley HT3166

The various engine drive belts must be checked for condition, tension and freedom from damage and excessive wear. The tension of a new belt must be checked after thirty minutes running following fitment of the new belt to allow for the initial belt stretch.

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE 28 CHECKING AND REPLACING

G150301TB-GAT

Diesel Engine

Auto tentioner fully Alternator Power steering pump A/C comp. G190B01A

At the scheduled maintenance inspection, belts should be examined for cracks, wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary.

Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine.

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

SG200A1-E

Fusible Links

GoodBad G201A01FC

The fusible link prevents damage to the wiring harness in the event of an electrical system malfunction. Failure of a fusiblelink is indicative of a serious overload condition having occurred and therefore the electrical system should be checked by a Hyundai authorised repairer before a replacement link is fitted.

WARNING:

Under no circumstances should a fusible link be replaced with anything other than a new link of the same rating. The use of higher rated links or other means of connecting the circuit will create a potential fire hazard.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 29

G20001E-EAT Individual Circuit Fuses

Interior view of a car showing a digital display unit mounted on the side panel (no visible text or symbols)

The fuse box containing the individual circuit fuses will be found in the back-side of multi box located in the right side of driver. The multi box is removed by pulling lightly and then releasing the lid. A fuse rating grid will be found on the reverse side of the cover. In the event of fuse failure, the fuse should be replaced with one of equivalent rating. A fuse removal tool is provided within the fuse box to facilitate replacement.

Close-up of hands installing or adjusting a circuit board component (no visible text or symbols)

In the event of a replacement fuse failing shortly after installation a malfunction within the circuit protected by that fuse is indicated. The circuit should be checked by a Hyundai authorised repairer at the first available opportunity.

Good Burned out G200B03Y

WARNING: The use of replacement fuses having a higher rating than specified or other means of connecting the circuit will create a potential fire hazard.

NOTE: See page 6-38 for the fuse pannel descriptions.

⊕

30

OWNER MAINTENANCE

BATTERY MAINTENANCE

SG210A1-E

Interior view of a car showing engine, dashboard, and exhaust pipe (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING:

Motor vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid which is corrosive and poisonous. Hydrogen gas is emitted from the battery which is explosive when combined with oxygen. The following precautions must be strictly observed to avoid personal injury or damage to the vehicle.

o If battery electrolyte is spilled onto skin or into eyes, the effected area must be flushed with copious amounts of water and medical assistance sought.
o If battery electrolyte is ingested, copious amounts of water or milk followed by an ant-acid (raw egg or milk of magnesia) must be drunk. Vomiting should not be induced and medical assistance must be sought.
o Batteries must only be charged in well ventilated areas from which naked lights or sources of sparks are excluded.
o Ensure that children, pets or other unauthorised persons are kept away from batteries.
o Do not allow anything to bridge the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery.
o Never invert the battery.

The battery fitted during production is of the "Maintenance Free" type.

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Do not touch the radiator fan until it is completely stopped.

As the coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

ELECTRIC COOLING FANS

SG220A1-E

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

The engine cooling fan should operate before the temperature gauge reaches the upper portion of the scale and the condenser fan should operate whenever the air conditioning is in use.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

SG230A1-E

Petrol engine MAX MIN HFC5004

Diesel engine MAX MIN G230402FC

The power steering fluid level should be checked daily.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

31

To check the power steering fluid level, be sure the ignition is "OFF", then check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:

Grinding noise from power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started in extremely cold condition (below -4°F). If the noise stops during warm up, there is no abnormal function in the system. This is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions.

FLUID RECOMMENDATION

Only automatic transmission fluid meeting the specification of PSF-3 or Dexron 2 should be used in the power steering system.

⊕

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE

32

SG230B1-E

POWER STEERING HOSES

Power steering hoses should be checked for damage, deterioration and leakage at each service.

BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM

(Diesel engine)

Close-up of a car engine bay with a highlighted component and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)

The fuel system should be bled to remove air as described in the illustration if the fuel supply is exhausted during travel, when the fuel filter is replaced, or if the vehicle is not used for a long time.

1. Remove the air cap with pushing the button.

Air pipeG350B01FC-EAT G350B01FC

1. Pump the hand pump until there are no more bubbles in the fuel coming out of the air pipe. When doing this, place a cloth around the air pipe to prevent the escaping fuel from spewing about.
2. Replace the air cap when there are no more bubbles in the fuel.
3. Continue pumping until the hand pump becomes stiff.
4. Finally, check to be sure that there is no leakage of fuel. If in doubt, consult your nearest Hyundai authorised repairer.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6

33

REMOVAL OF WATER FROM THE FUEL FILTER

G301402B-EAT

(Diesel engine)

WARNING:

o Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle whilst bleeding the fuel system.
o Be sure to carefully wipe away any water drained out in this manner, because the fuel mixed in the water might be ignited and result in a fire.

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible fuel tank and valve (no text or symbols)

If the fuel filter warning lamp illuminates during driving, it indicates that water has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs, remove the water as described.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a yellow curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the drain plug at the bottom of the fuel filter.
2. Tighten the drain plug when water no longer comes out.
3. Check to be sure that the warning lamp illuminates when the ignition key is turned to "ON", and that it goes off when the engine is started. If in doubt, consult your nearest Hyundai authorised repairer.

NOTE:

It is recommended that water accumulated in the fuel filter should be removed by an authorised Hyundai authorised repairer.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

34

WARNING:

o Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle whilst bleeding the fuel system.
o Be sure to carefully wipe away any water drained out in this manner, because the fuel mixed in the water might be ignited and result in a fire.

Extracting air in the fuel filter

If you drove until you have no fuel left or if you replaced the fuel filter, be sure to extract air in the fuel system as it makes you difficult to start the engine.

1) Remove the air extract nozzle cap on the fuel filter.
2) Pump up and down until the fuel flows out of the plug opening.

NOTE:

Use cloths when you extract air so that the fuel is not sprayed around. Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or the injection pump before starting the engine to prevent fire. Finally, check each part if the fuel is leaking.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A01FC-EAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.

1. Keep all tyres inflated to the correct pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press the front bumper & rear bumper down several times. Place the vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3,000 mm) from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tyre, jack, and tools).
4. Clean the head lights lens and turn on the headlight (Low beam).

Vertical Aiming Horizontal Aiming G2B0A01FC

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Draw the vertical line (through the centre of each headlight beam pattern) and the horizontal line (through the centre of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen. And then, draw the horizontal parallel line at 1.18 in. (30 mm) under the horizontal line.

3. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL AIMING
4. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to each vertical line with a phillips screwdriver - HORIZONTAL AIMING.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

35

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

G290B02FC-EAT

Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement

Horizontal line Vertical line 30mm (1.18 m) P" Cut-off line H L Ground line G290501L-D

If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced, the headlight aiming should be checked using the aiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turn on the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is parallel to the centre line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centre of the headlights.

Specifications:

"H"

Horizontal centre line of headlights from ground.

: 26.5 in.(675 mm)

"W"

Distance between each headlight centre.

: 46.3 in. (1,177 mm)

"L"

Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against.

: 118 in. (3,000 mm).

SG250A2-E

In the event of bulb failure being experienced, ensure that the relative lighting circuit is turned off prior to attempting to replace the bulb. The illustrations on the following page will assist in locating and removing the various bulbs. Ensure that the replacement bulb has the same cap configuration and wattage as the original.

See page 6-37 for the wattage descriptions.

CAUTION:

Keep the lamps out of contact with petroleum products, such as oil, petrol, etc.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

36

G270A02A-GAT

HEADLIGHT BULB

Replacement instructions:

Mechanical component diagram showing a cylindrical housing with mounting flanges and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.
2. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base, avoid touching the glass.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb base in the back of the headlight.
4. Remove the dust cover.

Mechanical component diagram showing a cylindrical housing with mounting flanges and a yellow arrow indicating a specific feature (no text or symbols present)

1. Push the bulb spring for removing the headlight bulb.
2. Remove the protective cap from the replacement bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Install the dust cover after retightening the bulb spring and reconnect the power cord.
3. Use the protective cap and carton to dispose of the old bulb.
4. Check for proper headlight aim.

WARNING

The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn on the bulb only when installed in a headlight. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care.

BULB WATTAGE OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 37

G260A02FC-EAT 5 2 1 7 6 4 3 8 12 11 10 9

G280A02FC-D

No.	Part Name		Wattage	Socket type	No.	Part Name		Wattage	Socket type
1	Front Position Light		5	W2.1×9.5D	8	High Mounted Rear Stop Light		21	BA 15s
2	Head Light (High/Low)		60/55	P43t-38	9	Rear Fog Light		21	BA 15s
3	Front Fog Light (Not all models)		55	PK22s	10	License Plate Light		5	W2.1×9.5D
4	Front Turn Signal Light		21	BA 15s	11	Luggage Compartment Light		5	S8.5/8.5
5	InteriorLight	Map Light	5	W2.1×9.5D	12	RearCombinationLight	Turn Signal Light	21	BA 15s
		Room Light	10	S8.5/8.5			Stop/Tail Light	21/5	BAY 15d
6	Side Repeater		10	W2.1×9.5D			Back -up Light	21	BA 15s
7	Front Door Edge Warning Light (Not all models)		5	W2.1×4.6D

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

38

FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C03FC-EAT

Engine Compartment

(Petrol Engine)

923-1760 USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES ONLY. الإستعمال : 1985 (العربية: 1985) (العربية: 1986) (العربية: 1987) (العربية: 1988) (العربية: 1989) (العربية: 1990) (العربية: 1991) (العربية: 1992) (العربية: 1993) (العربية: 1994) (العربية: 1995) (العربية: 1996) (العربية: 1997) (العربية: 1998) (العربية: 1999) (العربية: 2000) (العربية: 2001) (العربية: 2002) (العربية: 2003) (العربية: 2004) (العربية: 2005) (العربية: 2006) (العربية: 2007) (العربية: 2008) (العربية: 2009) (العربية: 2010) (العربية: 2011) (العربية: 2012) (العربية: 2013) (العربية: 2014) (العربية: 2015) (العربية: 2016) (العربية: 2017) (العربية: 2018) (العربية: 2019) (العربية: 2020)

G200C03FC

DESCRIPTION	FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
ALT	120A	Generator
B+	40A	(A/CON, RR HTD, STOP, D/LOCK, HAZARD) Fuse
ECU	30A	Generator, Engine control relay, ECM
RAD	20A	Radiator fan relay
IGN	40A	Start relay, Ignition switch
BLR	40A	Blower relay
P/WIN	30A	Power window relay
COND	20A	Condenser fan relay #1
ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
F/PUMP	10A	Fuel pump relay
INJ	15A	Injector, Ignition coil
SNSR	10A	MAP sensor, Oxygen sensor, CP sensor, Knock sensor, Throttle position sensor
ROOM LP	10A	Audio, Room lamp, Overhead console lamp, Instrument cluster
DRL	15A	DRL control module
HORN	10A	Horn relay
A/CON	10A	A/C relay
FR FOG	15A	Front fog lamp relay
ECU	10A	ECM, TCM
LP	20A	Tail lamp relay
TAIL LH	10A	Left rear combi lamp, Left position lamp, Left License lamp
TAIL RH	10A	Right rear combi lamp, Right position lamp, Right License lamp
H/LP LH	15A	Left head lamp
H/LP RH	15A	Right head lamp, (H/LP IND) Fuse

NOTE:

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 39

G200E00FC-GAT (Diesel Engine)

2019-13-17-65 USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES ONLY UNIONARY

91213 - 17570 PTC HTR1 하 EI1 40A GLOW PLUG 글로우 물러그 60A PTC HTR2 하 EI2 40A FFHS 온료필터 30A PTC HTR3 하 EI3 40A USE THE DESIGNATED FUSES ON.Y.

Estcdm ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ##### ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## #

G200E03FC
NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

⊕

6 OWNER MAINTENANCE

40

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
FUSE	ALT	140A	Generator
	B+	40A	(A/CON, RR HTD, STOP, D/LOCK, HAZARD) Fuse, Deicer
	ECU	30A	Generator, Engine control relay, ECM
	RAD	30A	Radiator fan relay
	IGN	40A	Start relay, Ignition switch
	BLR	40A	Blower relay
	P/WIN	30A	Power window relay
	COND	30A	Condenser fan relay #1
	ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
	ABS	40A	ABS control module, ABS bleeding connector, ESP
	F/PUMP	10A	Fuel pump relay
	ECU	30A	ECM No.5 (Batt+)
	ECU	10A	ECM No.4 (Batt+), Stop lamp switch, PTC heater relay #1
	SNSR	15A	Glow plug relay, Assistor heater relay 1/2, Stop lamp switch, TDC sensor, EGR act, Throttle plate act, VGT vacuum
	ROOM LP	10A	Audio, Room lamp, Overhead console lamp, Instrument cluster, ETACM, Luggage lamp
	DRL	15A	DRL control module
	HORN	10A	Horn relay
	A/CON	10A	A/C relay
	FR FOG	15A	Front fog lamp relay
	ECU	10A	ECM, TCM
	LP	20A	Tail lamp relay
	TAIL LH	10A	Left rear combi lamp, Left position lamp, Left License lamp
	TAIL RH	10A	Right rear combi lamp, Right position lamp, Right License lamp
	H/LP LH	15A	Left head lamp
	H/LP RH	15A	Right head lamp. (H/LP IND) Fuse
FUSIBLE	PTC HTR 1	40A	PTC heater relay #1
	GLOW	80A	GLOW relay
	PTC HTR 2	40A	PTC heater relay #2
	FFHS	30A	FFHS relay
	PTC HTR 3	40A	PTC heater relay #3

fcuk-6.p65 12/27/2006, 10:16 AM40

OWNER MAINTENANCE 6 41

G200001FC-GAT Inner Panel

THE DESHWEST PRICE ONLY	10A	10A	10A
	RR WPR	AUDIO	H/LP IND
	10A	15A	10A
	START	C/LIGHT	HTD IND
	20A	10A	10A
	FRT WPR	A/BAG	A/CON
	15A	10A	30A
	S/HTD	A/B IND	RR HTD
	25A	10A	10A
	P/OUTLET	T/SIG	STOP
	10A	15A	15A
	IG2	ECU	DR LOCK
	10A	10A	10A
	O/S MRR	ETACS	HAZARD

G200D01FC

DESCRIPTION	FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENTS
H/LP IND	10A	Head lamp indicator
HTD IND	10A	Defogger relay, Left(Right) outside mirror motor, Rear window motor
A/CON	10A	A/C Switch
RR HTD	30A	Defogger relay
STOP	10A	Stop lamp switch, Power window relay
D/LOCK	15A	Door lock(unlock) relay, ETACM, Sunroof relay
HAZARD	10A	Burglar alarm relay, Hazard relay
AUDIO	10A	Audio
C/LIGHT	15A	Cigarette lighter
A/B	10A	SRS control module
A/B IND	10A	SRS IND.
T/SIG	10A	Hazard switch, Seat belt timer, Instrument cluster, ABS control module, Pre-excitation resistor, Washer motor
ECU	15A	ECM, Vehicle speed sensor, TCM, Ignition coil
ETACS	10A	ETACM, A/T Shift lever
RR WPR	10A	Rear wiper motor, Rear wiper relay
START	10A	Start relay
FRT WPR	20A	Wiper relay, Washer motor, Wiper & Defogger timer
S/HTD	15A	Left (Right) front seat warmer switch
P/OUTLET	25A	Front (Rear) power outlet
IG2	10A	ETACM, Power window relay, Defogger relay, Sunroof relay Head lamp relay, Blower relay
O/S MRR	10A	Outside mirror switch, Rear fog lamp relay

Emission Control System 7-2

Catalytic Converter 7-3

EGR System 7-4

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Emission Control System .... 7-2 Catalytic Converter .... 7-3 EGR System .... 7-4 folk:7.p65 12/27/2006, 10:17 AM1 7 7

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

Depending upon the market for which the vehicle is destined, the emission control system will comprise one or more of the following emission control devices.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order that the proper functioning of the emission control systems may be ensured, it is recommended that the vehicle is inspected and maintained by an Hyundai authorised repairer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

SH010B1-E

1. Crankcase Emission Control System

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase by introducing fresh air to the crankcase through the air cleaner where this mixes with blow-by gases and then passes through the PCV valve into the intake manifold from where it subsequently enters the combustion chamber and is burned.

SH010C1-E

2. Evaporative Emission Control System

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapours from escaping into the atmosphere through the fuel tank ventilation system.

Whilst the engine is not running, fuel vapours generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in a charcoal canister.

When the engine is started, the vapours stored in the canister are drawn into the induction system through the purge control solenoid valve and are subsequently burned.

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the ECU; when the engine coolant temperature is low or the engine is idling, the purge control valve is closed and fuel vapours remain stored in the canister. Under normal running conditions when the engine is warm, the valve opens and the vapours are drawn into the inlet tract and subsequently burned in the combustion chamber.

SH010D1-F

3. Exhaust Emission Con Trol System

The exhaust emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emission whilst maintaining good vehicle performance.

Catalytic Convertor Operation Precautions

; For a petrol engine

Illustration of a car with visible exhaust pipes and roof structure (no text or symbols)

Catalytic Converter

HFC505

Hyundai Matrix models are fitted with catalytic convertors which require special operating considerations. The catalytic convertor serves to oxidize certain noxious elements of the exhaust gases leaving the engine to reduce the level of pollutants emitted from the vehicle and, provided that care is exercised to prevent damage, the catalyst will operate efficiently for the life of the vehicle.

It is of the utmost importance that the following information is read and understood by the vehicle operator in order to prevent operational problems arising from damage to the catalyst. Damage to the catalyst will result if contamination occurs through the use of leaded fuel. Whilst the vehicle is fitted with a reduced diameter filler neck to prevent charging of the fuel tank with a leaded fuel pump nozzle, it is possible that the use of funnels or fuel cans will permit leaded fuel to be introduced into the fuel tank.

The catalyst is intolerant of unburnt fuel and therefore if an engine misfire condition exists, damage to the catalyst will occur. It is imperative that if a misfire condition develops, the vehicle is immediately presented to a Hyundai authorised repairer for rectification. Similarly, the practice of certain ignition system diagnosis procedures which involve inducing a misfire (cylinder power balance tests for example) may result in catalyst damage. For these reasons, it is advisable that the exhaust gas emission be tested at each routine service with a gas analyzer having a Hydrocarbon measuring facility to ensure continued reliability of the catalyst.

Push or tow starting of the vehicle is to be avoided since unburnt fuel may enter the catalyst and result in damage. (Note, it is impossible to push or tow start a Hyundai model equipped with fuel injection since the fuel pump safety interlock will prevent the pump from operating under these conditions). Operation of the catalyst involves extremely high temperatures being attained within the catalytic convertor, and although the convertor is fitted with heat shields, it is important that the vehicle is not parked over combustible or volatile material which may result in fire.

If the above precautions are not adhered to and the catalyst becomes inoperative, the resultant increase in core temperature will result in a "melt down" where the catalyst core will melt and subsequently may block the exhaust system.

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 4 EGR SYSTEM

Due to the fragile nature of the catalyst element, it is important that damage does not occur when the vehicle is raised by means of a garage jack. Care must also be exercised to avoid driving over road hazards or debris which may cause damage to the catalyst element.

EGR SYSTEM

H02001S-GAT

; For a diesel engine

This system helps control oxides of nitrogen by recirculating a part of the exhaust gas into the engine.

H020001S-GAT

; For a diesel engine

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with oxidation type catalytic converter to reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and particulate contained in the exhaust gas.

fcuk-7.p65 12/27/2006, 10:17 AM4

CONSUMER INFORMATION

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 8-2

Engine Number....8-2

Tyre Pressures 8-3

Snow Tyres 8-3

Tyre Chains 8-3

Tyre Rotation 8-4

Tyre Balancing 8-4

Tyre Replacement 8-5

Wheel Replacement 8-5

Spare Tyre and Tools 8-6

⊕

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION

2 Y VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

I010AD1FC-EAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is unique to each individual vehicle and is the number (sometimes referred to as chassis number) used upon the vehicle registration document to identify the vehicle.

It can be found on the identification plate attached to apron panel located on the driver's side of the engine compartment.

SI010B1-E Engine Number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

TYRE CONSUMER INFORMATION 8 3

1030AD1FC-EAT TYRE PRESSURES

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a yellow arrow pointing to a specific component (no text or symbols visible)

In modern high-speed motoring, correct tyre pressures are vitally important. Incorrect tyre pressures can affect vehicle safety by causing reduced adhesion, steering response and tyre failure through overheating. The tyre pressure must only be checked when the tyres are cold. The correct tyre pressures are indicated on the label affixed to the driver's side "C" piller outer panel and below.

RIM SIZE	TYRE SIZE	PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
		UP TO 2 PERSONS		UP TO MAX. LOAD
		FRONT	REAR	FRONT	REAR
5.5x14	1856GR14	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
5.5x15	1856GR15	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
6.0x15	2056SR15	210(30)	210(30)	250(36)	250(36)
3.5x15	T11570D15	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)
3.5x15	T11570R15	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)	420(60)

Tyre pressures should be increased by 3 psi when the vehicle is driven fully laden or under conditions of sustained high speed motoring.

SI090A2-E SNOW TYRES

If it is desired to fit snow tyres to the vehicle, it must be ascertained that the original size and load carrying capacity are met by the replacement tyres. When using snow tyres, the vehicle should not be driven at speeds in excess of 60 MPH.

SI040A1-E TYRE CHAINS

Tyre chains, when included, should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are the proper size and that they are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. To minimise tyre and chain wear, do not continue to use tyre chains when they are no longer needed.

CAUTION: When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION 4

1080AD1FC-EAT TYRE ROTATION

Spare tyre HA1400

The tyre wear characteristics will vary between each tyre dependant upon the conditions of use. It is normal for the front tyres to wear more rapidly than those fitted to the rear of the vehicle and therefore tyre rotation will provide a means of helping to ensure an even wear rate across the tyre set. For vehicles fitted with radial ply tyres, rotation should be confined to front to rear tyre alternation. It is not recommended that radial ply tyres be rotated from side to side.

NOTE:

o Do not use the temporary spare tyre for tyre rotation.
o Aluminium wheels which are not supplied as Original Equipment should not be mixed on the same vehicle with the original steel wheels. However, it is acceptable that the steel spare wheel be used in conjunction with Original Equipment aluminium wheels since the offset of both wheels is compatible. Radial and cross ply tyres should not be mixed on the same vehicle.

SI060A1-E

TYRE BALANCING

Incorrect tyre balance will cause steering vibration and uneven tyre wear. The vehicle tyres are balanced during production but may need further balancing throughout the life of the tyres. It is recommended that the tyres be balanced on the car for best results and that the tyres are balanced whenever they have been removed from the wheel for repair.

中

CONSUMER INFORMATION

三

5

S105061-E

TYRE REPLACEMENT

0.06 in.(1.6 mm) Wear indicator I090V02FC

Tyres must be replaced when the wear indicators appear as a solid bar across the tyre tread. At this point, the remaining tread depth will be approximately 0.06 in.(1.6 mm). In addition to this, the tyre must be replaced if any portion of the tread has become bald or if there are any lumps, bulges or deep cuts in the sidewalls or tread. Replacement tyres must be of the recommended size and rating and should be of the same manufacture and tread pattern on each axle.

S108003-E

WHEEL REPLACEMENT

The original wheels may only be replaced with Hyundai Approved wheels. Tyres of different size, construction or tread pattern should not be intermixed on the same axle. Radial and cross ply tyres should not be used on the same vehicle.

The use of tyres and wheels of non approved sizes can be dangerous.

WARNING:

o Driving on worn or defective tyres is dangerous. Worn tyres may cause loss of steering control and a serious deterioration of braking efficiency. Defective tyres may cause vibration and loss of control through blow outs.
- Your vehicle is equipped with tyres designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tyre and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle.

It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury.

When replacing the tyres, be sure to equip all four tyres with the tyre and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tyre/wheel combination not recommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not use these tyres for highway driving.

o Tyres degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tyres generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tyre failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or death.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION 6 SPARE TYRE AND TOOLS

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a valve and gear (no text or symbols)

Your Hyundai is delivered with the following:

Spare tyre and wheel Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar, Span- ner, Screw driver Jack

fcuk-8.p65 12/27/2006, 10:17 AM6

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS Measurement......9-2 Engine......9-3 Lubrication Chart......9-4 fcuk-9.p65 12/27/2006, 10:17 AM1

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A01FC-EAT
MEASUREMENT
in. (mm)

Overall length		158.4(4,025)
Overall width		68.5(1,740)
Overall height (unladen)		64.3(1,635)*66.3(1,685)
Wheel base		102.3(2,600)
Wheel tread	Front	58.5(1,485)
	Rear	58.5(1,485)

* If installed roof rack

J020A01FC-EAT
POWER STEERING

Type	Rack and pinion
Wheel free play	0 - 1.18 in. (0 - 30 mm)
Rack stroke	5.7±0.04 in. (146±1mm)
Oil pump type	Vane type

Standard	185/65 R14
Option	195/55 R15205/55 R15 (1.8 DOHC only)

J030B01FC-EAT
SPARE TYRE

Standard	Space-saver
Option	Full size

J040A02FC-EAT
ELECTRICAL

Item	Petrol	Diesel
Battery	MF45AH	CMF 68 AH
Generator	90A (13.5V)	120A (12V)

J050A01FC-GAT
BRAKE

Type	Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type	Ventilated disc
Rear brake type	Drum
Parking brake	Cable

ENGINE

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

JD70A05FC-EAT

ITEMS			PETROL	DIESEL
Engine Type			1.6/1.8 4Cylinder in-line DOHC	1.5 4Cylinder in-line DOHC
Idle Speed (RPM)	A/CON OFF		800 ± 100 (1.6L), 750 ± 100 (1.8L)	740 ± 100
	A/CON ON		800 ± 100 (1.6L), 800 ± 100 (1.8L)
Valve Clearance(Cold engine:20 ± 5°C)	For adjusting	Intake	0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm) (1.8DOHC)	AUTO LASH(1.6DOHC/Diesel)
		Exhaust	0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in. (0.25 ~ 0.31 mm) (1.8 DOHC)
	For checking	Intake	0.0047 ~ 0.011 in. (0.12 ~ 0.28 mm) (1.8 DOHC)	AUTO LASH(1.6DOHC/Diesel)
		Exhaust	0.0079 ~ 0.015 in. (0.20 ~ 0.38 mm) (1.8 DOHC)
Ignition Timing			BTDC 5" ± 5" (1.6L), BTDC 7" ± 5" (1.8L)	-
Firing Order			1 - 3 - 4 - 2	1 - 3 - 2

⊕

Q VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4 LUBRICATION CHART

J080A07FC-EAT

Item			Oil & Grease Standard	Q'ty (Imp.qts) (litre)
Engine Oil Petrol engine			API SJ, SL SAE 5W-20, 5W-30or ABOVE, SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F)ILSAC GF-3 SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE 10°F)or ABOVE SAE 20W-50 (ABOVE 20°F)	1.6 DOHC - 2.9 (3.3) (with oil filter)1.8 DOHC - 3.5 (4.0) (with oil filter)
RecommendsShellHELIXMotor oils		Diesel engine	API CH-4 SAE 30 (0°C ~ 40°C)or ABOVE, SAE 20W-40 (ABOVE -10°C)ACEA B4 SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -15°C)or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 (-20°C ~ 40°C)SAE 5W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)SAE 0W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1, *2*1. Restricted to driving condition and vehicle destination*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation	1.5 CRDi - 4.7 (5.3) (with oil filter)

INDEX 10 10 fcuk-10.p65 12/27/2006, 10:14 AM1

⊕

10 INDEX

2

A

ACCESSORY TRAY 1-67

AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH 1-82

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ..... 6-24

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT 6-14

ANTENNA 1-95

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) 2-14

ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM 1-8

ASHTRAY 1-61

AUTO FUEL CUT SWITCH 1-75

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-10

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID 6-19

B

BATTERY MAINTENANCE 6-30

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE.... 2-3

BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM 6-32

BONNET RELEASE 1-70

BRAKE PEDAL FREEPLAY 6-27

BRAKE TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (BTCS) .... 2-14

CARGO AREA COVER 1-74

CATALYTIC CONVERTOR OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

7-3

CENTRE VENTILATOR 1-76

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKS 1-7

CHANGING A FLAT TYRE 3-7

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID 6-23

CHILD-PROOF REAR DOOR LOCK 1-7

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1-24

CIGAR LIGHTER 1-60

CLUTCH PEDAL FREEPLAY 6-26

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH AND

STEERING LOCK 2-3

COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE 1-49

D

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 2-18

E

EFFECTIVE BRAKING 2-17

ELECTRIC COOLING FANS 6-31

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)...... 2-16

EMERGENCY TOWING 3-14

ENGINE COOLANT CHECKING AND REPLACING. 6-12

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REPLACEMENT 6-8

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION 6-8

ENGINE OIL REPLENISHMENT 6-7

ENGINE OIL 6-5

EXTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR 1-67

INDEX 10 3

F

FOLDING REAR SEATBACK AND SEAT CUSHION .... 1-16

FOLD-UP TRAY 1-70

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH 1-58

FUEL ECONOMY 2-7

FUEL GAUGE 1-49

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS 1-2

FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION 6-38

FUSIBLE LINKS 6-28

G

GLOVE BOX 1-67

H

HATCHBACK DOOR 1-72

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM 1-57

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTEMENT 6-34

HEADLIGHT BULB 6-36

HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM 1-59

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT 1-13, 1-16

HEATED REAR WINDOW 1-57

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START 3-2

IF THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE 3-7

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE TOWED 3-12

IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 1-4

INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT FUSES 6-29

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATORS ..... 1-40

INTERIOR LIGHT 1-65

INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR 1-69

J

JUMP STARTING 3-3

K

KEY POSITIONS 2-4

L

LIGHTING SWITCH 1-54

LUGGAGE NET 1-73

LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTMENT.... 1-14

⊕

10 INDEX

4

M

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING REQUIREMENTS .... 5-2

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

5-6

MANUAL TRANSAXLE 2-8

MANUAL TRANSAXLE LUBRICANT....6-18

MAP LIGHT 1-65

MULTI BOX 1-66

MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH 1-54

0

OVERDRIVE SWITCH 2-12

P

PARKING BRAKE 1-62

POWER OUTLET 1-60

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL 6-31

POWER STEERING HOSES 6-32

POWER WINDOW 1-11

PROTECTING YOUR HYUNDAI FROM CORROSION .... 4-2

R

REAR FOG AUDIBLE WARNING SOUND 1-49

REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH 1-58

REAR SEAT ARM REST 1-63

REAR SEAT WARNING 1-19

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS 2-9

REMOTE FUEL FILLER LID RELEASE 1-71

REMOVAL OF WATER FROM THE FUEL FILTER . 6-33

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS 6-35

ROOF RACK 1-74

RUNNING IN 1-3

S

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 5-3

SEAT ADJUSTMENT 1-12

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS 1-19

SEAT BELTS 1-19

SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT 1-14

SEAT WARMER.... 1-18

SERVICE HISTORY 5-2

SIDE VENTILATOR 1-76

SMOOTH CORNERING 2-19

SNOW TYRES 8-3

SPARE WHEEL 3-6

SPECTACLE CASE 1-66

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM ... 1-33

STARTING THE ENGINE 2-3

STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY 6-26

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER 1-75

INDEX 10 5

T TOWING ATTACHMENTS ...... 2-22
TRAILER AND CARAVAN TOWING 2-21
TRIP COMPUTER 1-52
TYPE PRESSURES 8-3
TYRE BALANCING 8-4
TYRE CHAINS 8-3
TYRE REPLACEMENT 8-5
TYRE ROTATION 8-4

U UNDER TRAY 1-15

V VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8-2

W WHEEL REPLACEMENT 8-5

WINTER MOTORING 2-19

HYUNDAI

Owner's Manual

MATRIX

영국용

HYUNDAI MOTOR U.K

ST.JOHN'S COURT

EASTON STREET, HIGHWYCOMBE

BUCKS, HP11 1JX, U.K

TEL NO:01494-428600

FAX NO:01494-428699

www.hyundai-car.co.uk

Printing : DEC. 01, 2005

Publication No.:A17O-UK6DM

Printed in Korea